Yamaha NP-V80 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: NP-V80

Categoría: Instrumentos musicales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

60
NP-V60

Setting UpReferenceAppendix Quick Guide

Owner’s Manual

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).

DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other

than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically

recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING:

Do not place this product in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any

kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an

extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG.

NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling

capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at

the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or

modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update

existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and

headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels

that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long

periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-

able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you

should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory

mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as

optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer

assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and

any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE

using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are

not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the

owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-

ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-

ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be

aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and

never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-

rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and

battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-

teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-

son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all

local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-

ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable

to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model

number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this

plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual

as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP (bottom)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

Owner’s Manual

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and elec-

tronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable col-

lection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any

potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate

waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local munici-

pality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further informa-

tion.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local

authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set

by the Directive for the chemical involved.

(weee_battery_eu_en)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge

som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten

har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE

afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t

endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita

koko laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom

of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space

provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record

of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom)

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,

Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard

Model Name : NP-V80/NP-V60

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the

terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the ter-

minal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal

of the three pin plug.

* This applies only to products distributed by

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

(2 wires)

Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-

circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it,

or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 97) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument

or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any

openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power

immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the

instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together

with old ones.

• Do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or

batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same

maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage.

• Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.

• Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with

water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss

of sight or chemical burns.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity

markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid

leakage.

• When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,

remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery

fluid.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch

and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries,

remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by

Yamaha service personnel.

• The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

• It emits unusual smells or smoke.

• Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

• There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the

instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the

plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily

accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is

turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When

you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord

from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal

components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,

set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and

gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired

listening level.

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or

keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.

If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

Battery

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

Connections

Handling caution

(7)-1 1/2

Owner’s Manual

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the [ ](Standby/On) switch is standby (the LCD backlight is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the

instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of damage to the product, data or other property, follow the notices below.

 Handling and Maintenance

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day)

to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

 Saving data

• Some data items (page 50) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to

malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device (NP-V80 only)/or other external device such as a computer (page 88).

(NP-V80 only) To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices/or other external device

such as a computer.

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal

use.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use

others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and

sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of

 About functions/data bundled with the instrument

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your

instrument.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

(7)-1 2/2

Owner’s Manual

Logos

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible

music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer.

The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation for-

mat. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in

mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of

control parameters and effects.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with

peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the

computer is on).

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to

provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

Owner’s Manual

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of four main sections: “Setting Up,” “Quick Guide,” “Reference,” and “Appendix.”

Also, a separate “Data List” is provided.

Owner’s Manual (this book)

Data List

Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

MIDI Reference

The MIDI Reference section contains MIDI related information. The MIDI Reference is available for

downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library at: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Included Accessories

The package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.

• AC Power Adaptor

* May not be included depending on your particular area.

Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

• Owner’s Manual

• Music rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Footswitch (NP-V80 only)

• Data List

• My Yamaha Product User Registration

* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when

you fill out the User Registration form.

Setting Up

• • • • • • • • •

Please read this section first.

This section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this

section while playing the instrument.

Quick Guide

• • • • • • • • •

Reference

• • • • • • • • •

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instru-

ment’s various functions.

Appendix

• • • • • • • • •

This section includes troubleshooting information and specifica-

tions.

Insert the music

rest into the slots

as shown.

Music Rest

Owner’s Manual

Special Features

Graded Soft Touch keyboard

Just as on an actual piano, the lower keys are heavy in touch and the higher keys

are light, with soft touch of digital keyboard for beginners.

Play a Variety of Instrument Voices

Page 16

The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to

violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the

mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead.

Experience a whole new world of musical variety.

Play Along with Styles

Page 23

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.

The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cover-

ing a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and much

more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with

new styles to expand your musical horizons.

Using Songs

Page 26

You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just

about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technol-

ogy feature, lessons, and more.

Arpeggio Function (NP-V80 only)

Page 20

Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function

automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the

appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be produced by

changing your fingering or the arpeggio type.

042

EuTrance

Owner’s Manual

Quick GuideReferenceAppendix Setting Up

Contents

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List ........................7

Included Accessories .......................................................7

Special Features ..............................................................8

Setting Up

Setting Up 10

Power Requirements......................................................10

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack).....11

Connecting a Footswitch or a Foot Pedal

(SUSTAIN Jack).............................................................11

Turning the Power On ....................................................11

Panel Controls and Terminals 12

Basic Operation and Displays 14

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN.....................................16

Play the Grand Piano Voice ...........................................17

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL ......................18

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

—SPLIT..........................................................................18

Using the Metronome.....................................................19

Creating Arpeggios (NP-V80 only) 20

Use the Arpeggio Function.............................................20

Changing the Arpeggio type...........................................21

Playing Styles 22

Select a Style Rhythm....................................................22

Play Along with a Style...................................................23

Playing Songs 26

Select and Listen to a Song ...........................................26

Select and Play Songs on a USB Flash Memory

(NP-V80 only).................................................................28

Play Songs in Sequence ................................................29

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............29

Reference

Select a Song For a Lesson 30

The Easy Way to Play Piano 34

Play Using the Music Database 40

Change a Song’s Style 41

Record Your Own Performance 43

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 48

Backup and Initialization 50

Backup ...........................................................................50

Initialization ....................................................................50

Handy Performance Features 51

Adding Reverb ...............................................................51

Adding Chorus ...............................................................51

Panel Sustain .................................................................52

Pitch Controls (Transpose).............................................52

Pitch Controls (Tuning) ..................................................53

Setting the Metronome Time Signature..........................53

Adjusting the Metronome Volume..................................54

Pitch Bend......................................................................54

One Touch Setting .........................................................54

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound.......................55

Auto Power Off Setup ....................................................55

Voice Settings 56

Voice Editing ..................................................................56

Selecting a Dual Voice...................................................57

Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................57

Touch Response Sensitivity (NP-V80)...........................58

Touch Response Sensitivity (NP-V60)...........................58

Harmony ........................................................................59

Arpeggio Settings (NP-V80 only) 60

Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics

...60

Synchronizing an arpeggio to a tempo of Style or Song

...60

Holding the arpeggio Playback ......................................61

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 62

Pattern Variation (Sections) ...........................................62

Changing the tempo of the Style....................................64

Adjusting the Style Volume ............................................64

Setting the Split Point.....................................................65

Tap Start ........................................................................65

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm

(Stop Accompaniment) ..................................................66

Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard......................66

Loading Style Files (NP-V60).........................................67

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............68

Song Settings 69

BGM Playback ...............................................................69

Random Song Playback ................................................69

Changing the tempo of the Song ...................................70

Song Volume .................................................................70

A-B Repeat ....................................................................71

Muting Independent Song Tracks ..................................71

Tap Start ........................................................................72

Change the Melody Voice..............................................72

The Functions 73

Selecting and Setting Functions ....................................73

Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) 76

File Control Functions ....................................................76

Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal ..........................................................................77

Using USB Storage Devices ..........................................77

Connecting to a Computer 84

Connecting a Personal Computer..................................84

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

...85

Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument

...86

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 89

Important Notices about the CD-ROM ...........................89

CD-ROM Contents.........................................................90

System Requirements....................................................91

Software Installation.......................................................91

Appendix

Troubleshooting 96

Specifications 97

Index 98

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.

Power Requirements

Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an

AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete

resources. USB flash memory save, delete, and format operations can only be performed on the NP-V80 when the

instrument is being powered from an AC adapter. These operations cannot be performed using battery power.

Using an AC Power Adaptor

1 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.

2 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

Using Batteries

1 Open the battery compartment cover located on the

instrument’s bottom panel.

2 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow

the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-

ment.

3 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it

locks firmly in place.

For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V

“AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline bat-

teries are recommended.) When battery power becomes

too low for proper operation, make sure to replace all

batteries, following the precautions listed below.

If necessary, also make sure to save all important User

data (see pages 50, 88).

• Use the specified adaptor (page 97). The use of other

adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the

adaptor and the instrument.

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the

instrument, or during electrical storms.

• Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies

power from the adaptor and overrides battery power, even

when batteries are installed.

WARNING

CAUTION

AC outlet

AC power

adaptor

NOTE

• Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, main-

taining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery

installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corro-

sive chemicals.

• When the batteries run down, replace them with a com-

plete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new bat-

teries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline

and manganese) at the same time.

• If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of

time, remove the batteries to prevent possible fluid leakage.

• The use of alkaline batteries is recommended for this

instrument. Other types of batteries may exhibit a sudden

drop in power when the batteries are low, possibly result-

ing in a loss of flash memory data.

• Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to

flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can

be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries

do become drained during a data transfer, both the data

being transferred and the data currently in the transfer des-

tination will be lost.

CAUTION

NOTICE

Setting Up

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.

Connecting Headphones

(PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4" stereo

phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient

monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off

when a plug is inserted into this jack.

The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an

external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUT-

PUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system,

mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device

to send the instrument’s output signal to that device.

Connecting a Footswitch or a

Foot Pedal (SUSTAIN Jack)

The SUSTAIN jack is for connecting the footswitch or

foot pedal. The pedal functions in the same way as a

damper pedal on an acoustic piano. Connect an

included footswitch (NP-V80 only) or an optional

footswitch FC4/FC5 to this jack and press the pedal to

sustain the sound. An optional FC3 foot pedal can

also be connected to this jack.

If you connect an optional pedal of FC3, the half

pedal function* can be used.

* half pedal function

While you playing the piano with SUSTAIN and if you need to

delete the cloudy sound, release the foot from pedal to half posi-

tion.

Turning the Power On

The [ ](Standby/On) switch turns the power to the

instrument on or standby. Turn down the volume by

turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left

and press the [ ](Standby/On) switch to turn on the

power. Press the [ ](Standby/On) switch again to

turn the power standby.

While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level

by using the [MASTER VOLUME] control.

• Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for

long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear

fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing.

• To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the

external devices at the minimum setting before connecting

them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in elec-

tric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the

volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradu-

ally raise the volume controls while playing the instrument

to set the desired listening level.

WARNING

CAUTION

• The sustain function does not affect split voices.

• Make sure that power is OFF when connecting or discon-

necting the pedal.

• Do not press the pedal while turning the power on. Other-

wise, the switch or pedal type (on/off) will be reversed.

• Even when the switch is standby, electricity is still flowing

to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not

using the instrument for a long time, make sure you

unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/

or remove the batteries from the instrument.

NOTE

CAUTION

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Panel Controls and Terminals

Front Panel

q [ ](Standby/On) switch...................... page 11

w [MASTER VOLUME] control ................ page 11

e [DEMO/BGM] button ............................page 29

r [REC] button.........................................page 43

t [1]–[5], [A] buttons ...............................page 44

LESSON

[RIGHT] button..................................page 30

[LEFT] button ....................................page 30

y LESSON START

[WAITING] button..............................page 30

[YOUR TEMPO] button .....................page 32

[MINUS ONE] button.........................page 33

u [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .. pages 19, 53

i [TEMPO/TAP] button.. pages 19, 64, 65, 70, 72

o [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button ........................page 35

!0 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button......page 41

!1 SONG

[REPEAT&LEARN] button................ page 33

[A-B REPEAT] button .......................page 71

[REW] button ....................................page 29

[FF] button ........................................page 29

[PAUSE] button ................................. page 29

[START/STOP] button....................... page 27

!2 STYLE

[ACMP ON/OFF] button.................... page 23

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .............page 63

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ................page 63

[SYNC STOP] button ........................ page 63

[SYNC START] button....................... page 62

[START/STOP] button....................... page 22

!3 [SONG] button...................................... page 26

!4 [STYLE] button..................................... page 22

!5 [VOICE] button ..................................... page 16

!6 [MUSIC DATABASE] button.................page 40

t y

o !0

Front Panel

Display (page 15)

The panel illustrations shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the NP-V80.

Panel Controls and Terminals

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

!7 [FUNCTION] button..............................page 73

!8 [GRAND PIANO] button.......................page 17

!9 REGIST [MEMORY/BANK],

[1]–[4] buttons ......................................page 48

@0 CATEGORY [] and []

buttons .......................................... pages 14, 73

@1 DATA ENTRY

Dial, Number buttons [0]–[9],

[+] and [-] buttons .............................page 14

@2 [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button

(NP-V80 only) .......................................page 20

[TOUCH ON/OFF] button

(NP-V60 only) .......................................page 58

@3 [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................ pages 18, 57

@4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button................ pages 18, 57

@5 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ...............page 59

@6 PITCH BEND wheel..............................page 54

@7 USB TO DEVICE terminal

(NP-V80 only) .......................................page 76

Rear Panel

@8 USB TO HOST terminal ....................... page 84

@9 SUSTAIN jack ....................................... page 11

#0 PHONES/OUTPUT jack........................ page 11

#1 DC IN jack............................................. page 10

iveGPno

@8 @9 #0 #1

!99

!4 !5

!6 !7

@0 @1

Rear Panel

NP-V60

[TOUCH ON/OFF] button

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Basic Operation and Displays

Basic Operation

Press a button to select a basic function: Voice, Style or Song. To change the instrument voice that sounds when

you play the keyboard, press the [VOICE] button. If you want to play along with auto accompaniment, press the

[STYLE] button. If you want to listen to a song, press the [SONG] button.

LiveGPno

Press briefly

to increase.

3 Start a function or play

the keyboard.

2 Select an item

or value.

1 Select a basic

function.

Rotate the dial clockwise to

increase the value of the

selected item, or counter-

clockwise to decrease it’s

value. Rotate the dial con-

tinuously to continuously

increase or decrease the

value.

Dial

Increase

When selecting a song or

style, you can use these but-

tons to jump to the first item in

the next or previous category.

The CATEGORY [ ] and

[ ] buttons can also be used

to select function items

sequentially after pressing the

[FUNCTION] button.

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

The number buttons can be

used to directly enter a Song,

Style or Voice number or

parameter value.

For numbers that start with

one or two zeroes, the first

zeroes can be omitted.

Example:

Selecting Voice 003, Grand

Piano.

Number buttons [0]–[9]

Press the [+] button briefly

to increase the value by 1, or

press the [-] button briefly to

decrease the value by 1.

Press and hold either button

to continuously increase or

decrease the value in the cor-

responding direction.

[+], [-] buttons

Decrease

Press briefly

to decrease.

Jump to the

first item in

the next or

category.

Press number but-

tons [0], [0], [3].

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an

alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held.

Hold down this button until the function calls up.

When SONG is selected via the basic function buttons 1

above, the SONG indicator will light. When STYLE is selected

the STYLE indicator will light. The corresponding labels

above (SONG) or below (STYLE) the buttons then apply.

Basic Operation and Displays

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Display Items

The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.

It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.

001

LiveGPno

Indicates that Touch response is

turned on. (page 58)

Indicates that Harmony is

turned on. (page 59)

Indicates that the Dual voice is

turned on. (page 18)

Indicates that the Split voice is

turned on. (page 18)

Indicates that the Arpeggio is

turned on. (page 20)

Indicates that performance

assistant technology is turned

on. (page 33)

Indicates that Accompaniment

is turned on. (page 23)

Indicates that SYNC STOP is

turned on. (page 63)

TOUCH

HARMONY

DUAL

SPLIT

ARPEGGIO (NP-V80 only)

Performance assistant technology

ACMP ON

SYNC STOP

Displays the melody and

chord notes of a song when

the Song Lesson function is

in use, or the notes of chords

you specify when the Dic-

tionary function is in use. At

other times the notes you

play on the keyboard are dis-

played.

Notation

• Any notes occurring below or above the staff are

indicated by “8va” in the notation.

• For a few specific chords, not all notes may be

shown in the notation section of the display. This

is due to space limitations in the display.

NOTE

Indicates the beat number in a mea-

sure during the Metronome func-

tion. Indicates the current measure during playback

of a song or style, and the currently set Tempo

value for the song or style. (pages 19, 45)

Indicates the name of the chord currently

being played back, or the name of the

chord being played on the keyboard. (page 23)

Information related to the

song tracks is shown here.

(pages 29, 44, 71)

BEAT number and MEASURE

Chord Display

Track Display

001

Indicates the current style or song

beat with flashing arrows. (page 27)

Beat Display

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instru-

ment has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet,

drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds.

This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The voice number and name will be displayed.

Select the voice you want to play.

While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The avail-

able voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice

selected here becomes the main voice.

For this example select the “102 Flute” voice.

Preset Voice Types (NP-V80)

Preset Voice Types (NP-V60)

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN

001

LiveGPno

Appears when the Voice

mode is engaged.

Voice name

Voice number

• You can also select the voice

using the CATEGORY [ ]

and [ ] buttons after press-

ing the [VOICE] button.

(page 14)

NOTE

102

Flute

Select 102 Flute

001–127 Instrument Voices

128–139

(Drum Kit)

Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to

individual keys, via which they can be played. Details

on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the

Drum Kit List of the separate Data List.

001–116 Instrument Voices

117–128

(Drum Kit)

Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to

individual keys, via which they can be played. Details

on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the

Drum Kit List of the separate Data List.

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

Owner’s Manual

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.

When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [GRAND PIANO] button.

The Grand Piano voice will be selected.

• Voice Settings (page 56)

NOTE

Play the Grand Piano Voice

• When you press the

[GRAND PIANO] button all

settings other than touch

sensitivity are turned off. The

dual and split voices will

also be turned off, so only

the Grand Piano voice will

play over the entire key-

board.

NOTE

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Once you press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the dual function on, a second voice will sound

that will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as

the “dual” voice.

Press the button a second time to turn the dual voice function off. A suitable

dual voice is automatically selected when you turn on this function, but you

can easily select a different dual voice (page 57).

Once you press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the split function on, you can play different voices

to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of

the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The

split point setting can be changed as required (page 65).

Press the button a second time to turn the split voice function off. A suitable

split voice is automatically selected when you turn on this function, but you

can easily select a different split voice (page 57).

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL

102

Flute

Appears when

dual voice is on

Two voices will sound

at the same time.

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT

102

Flute

Split voice

Split point

Main voice and dual voice

Appears when split

voice is on

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

Owner’s Manual

The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is convenient

for practicing.

Press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button to start the metronome. To stop

the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again.

If you want to adjust the metronome tempo, press the [TEMPO/TAP] button

to call up the Tempo setting in the display, then you can use the dial to set

the tempo. You can also set the tempo using the number buttons on the front

panel.

You can set the time signature (page 53).

Using the Metronome

001

LiveGPno

Indicates the beat number in a

measure during the Metronome

function.

• You can set the time signa-

ture (page 53).

NOTE

090

Tempo

Current Tempo value

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios (NP-V80 only)

The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply playing the

required notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the

root, third, and fifth—and the arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of

interesting arpeggio-type phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you

play it is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be used for

music production as well as performance.

Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the

arpeggio function on.

The button lights when the Arpeggio function is on.

Play a note or notes on the keyboard to trigger

Arpeggio playback.

The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the

number of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in.

When the split function is on, the arpeggio applies to the split voice.

The arpeggio applies to the main and dual voices when the split func-

tion is off. Arpeggios cannot be played using the split and main/dual

voices simultaneously.

When you have finished playing with the arpeggio

function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to

turn it off.

Use the Arpeggio Function

• When an FC4 or FC5 foot-

switch is connected to the

SUSTAIN jack is pressed,

the Arpeggio will continue to

play after the note is

released (page 61).

NOTE

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios (NP-V80 only)

Owner’s Manual

The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you select a voice, but you can easily

select any other arpeggio type.

Press and hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for

longer than a second.

“ARP Type” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the

name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display.

Rotate the dial to select the desired arpeggio type.

A list of the available arpeggio types is provided in the Arpeggio List

of the separate Data List.

You can save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall

them at any time you want to repeat your performance (page 48). You

can also record your performance (page 43). Please note that the

arpeggio sound for the split voice cannot be recorded.

Changing the Arpeggio type

PfArp2

The currently selected

arpeggio type

Hold for longer

than a second.

• No arpeggio will sound if

you turn the arpeggio func-

tion on while playing notes

on the keyboard.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment

(rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your

left hand. You can select from 165 different styles on the NP-V80, or 160 different styles

on the NP-V60.

In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.

Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues,

Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is

played using percussion instruments only.

Press the [STYLE] button.

The style number and name will appear in the display.

Select a style.

Use the dial to select the style you want to use.

A list of all the available styles is provided in the Style List of the sep-

arate Data List.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The style rhythm will start playing.

Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop

playback.

Select a Style Rhythm

001

Std 8Bt

This icon appears when a style

number and name is displayed.

Style Name

Style Number

• You can also use the style

files provided on the sup-

plied CD-ROM. Refer to

page 81 for NP-V80 instruc-

tions, or page 67 for NP-V60

instructions.

NOTE

102

PopBossa

• The “Serenade” style in the

Waltz category and all styles

in the Pianist category styles

have no rhythm part and

therefore no rhythm will play

if you use them for the above

example. For these styles

first turn auto accompani-

ment on as described on

page 23, press the [START/

STOP] button, and the

accompaniment bass and

chord parts will begin play-

ing when you play a key to

the left of the keyboard split

point.

NOTE

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

Owner’s Manual

You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.

Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich

accompaniment that you can play along with.

Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired

style.

For this example select the “153 PnoBoogi” style.

Turn automatic accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompani-

ment off.

Turn sync start on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.

When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in

a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the key-

board split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start

function off.

Play Along with a Style

153

PnoBoogi

This icon appears when automatic

accompaniment is on.

When automatic accompaniment is on ...

The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the

“auto accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the accompani-

ment chords.

Auto accompa-

niment range

Split point (page 65)

153

PnoBoogi

Flashes when sync start is on.

Playing Styles

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Start playing.

Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompa-

niment range of the keyboard. Try playing the chord progression

shown below.

This is a simple-but-effective chord progression.

Stop playing.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re

done.

You can also stop playing by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] but-

ton so that an appropriate ending pattern will play and then style play-

back will stop.

You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.

Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 62.

• Chords (page 25)

• Looking Up Chords Using

the Chord Dictionary (page

68)

NOTE

C C

Auto accompa-

niment range

Split point

Indicates the chord currently being played in

the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

001

153

PnoBoogi

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

Owner’s Manual

Chords

For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful

chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for

further details.

 indicates the root note.

• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions:

m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2

• Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.

• sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only.

Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three

fingers.

For root “C”

To play a major chord

Press the root note ()

of the chord.

To play a minor chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

black key to the left of it.

To play a seventh chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

white key to the left of it.

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together with

the nearest white and black keys

to the left of it (three keys alto-

gether).

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing Songs

With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music.

You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any

of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, les-

sons, and more. The songs are organized by category.

In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30

songs provided.

Press the [SONG] button.

The song number and name will be displayed.

You can use the dial to select a different song.

Select a song.

Select a song after referring to the Song List in the separate Data List.

Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.

The songs are organized by category.

Select and Listen to a Song

011

Nocturne

The currently selected song and

number are displayed

• You can also play songs you

have recorded yourself

(User Songs) or songs that

have been transferred to the

instrument from a computer

in the same way that you

play the internal songs.

NOTE

012

ForElise

The song displayed

here can be played

Song No. Category Description

001–003 Main Demo

The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea

of the advanced capabilities of this instrument.

004–008 Voice Demo

These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful

voices.

009–011 Function Demo

Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced

features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10

and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature.

012–015 Piano Solo These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs.

016–020 Piano Ensemble

A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for

use as lesson songs.

021–030

Piano

Accompaniment

When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns,

these are the songs to do it with.

031–035 User Song Songs you record yourself.

036– Flash Memory

Songs stored on a USB flash memory plugged into the NP-V80,

or songs transferred from a computer (pages 28, 87).

Quick Guide

Playing Songs

Owner’s Manual

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected

song.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button again.

• Score data for the 30 internal

songs are provided in the

Songbook on the CD-ROM.

The exceptions are songs

1–11 and 30. The scores for

songs 9 to 11 are provided in

the separate Data List.

NOTE

The arrow marks in the beat display flash in

time with the rhythm of the song or style.

012

ForElise

Playing Songs

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

MIDI songs stored on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument can be directly selected and

played.

The procedure is exactly the same as that for selecting internal songs (page

26). Songs on a USB flash memory are numbered from 36 upward, so all

you need to do is select song number 36 or higher.

Select and Play Songs on a USB Flash Memory (NP-V80 only)

• Precautions when using the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal

(page 77)

• In order to play data copied

to a USB flash memory from

a computer or other device,

the data must be stored

either in the USB flash mem-

ory’s root directory or a first-

level/second-level folder in

the root directory. Data

stored in third-level-folders

created inside a second-

level folder cannot be

selected and played by this

instrument.

NOTE

IMPORTANT

Song Title Display Language

File names containing Japanese katakana characters will be properly displayed if the

instrument’s display language is set to “Japanese”. All display information other than

file names will be displayed in English even if “Japanese” is selected. Kanji charac-

ters cannot be displayed. The display language can be set via the “Language” func-

tion (page 75).

USB flash memory (Root)

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

Can be selected/played.

Cannot be selected/played.

Quick Guide

Playing Songs

Owner’s Manual

Press the [DEMO/BGM] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback will repeat continu-

ously, starting again from the first Song (001). You can stop playback at any time by pressing the

[DEMO/BGM] button.

It is also possible to specify continuous playback of all internal songs, all

songs transferred from a computer, or all MIDI songs on a USB flash mem-

ory connected to the instrument (page 69). This capability can be combined

with the random playback function (page 69) for BGM type playback of any

songs you like using the instrument’s internal tone generator.

These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],

rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.

Play Songs in Sequence

• You can select a song by

using the [+] button after

pressing the [DEMO/BGM]

button. The [-] button can be

used to go back to the

beginning of the selected

song.

NOTE

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause

• When an A-B repeat range is

specified the fast reverse

and forward function will

only work within that range.

NOTE

REW

Press the fast reverse

button to rapidly

return to an earlier

point in the song.

Press the fast forward

button to rapidly skip

ahead to a later point

in the song.

PAUS E

Press the pause button

to pause playback.

When lit the functions indi-

cated by the labels above the

buttons can be used.

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Select a Song For a Lesson

Yamaha Education Suite

You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands les-

son. During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong

notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to

start learning!

The practice methods:

Lesson 1—Waiting

In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play

the right note.

Select a song for your lesson.

Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! For this example

try selecting the “012 ForElise”.

Turn off playback of the part you wish to practice.

The preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts. The right-hand part is

selected by the [RIGHT](1) button and the left-hand part is selected by the

[LEFT](2) button. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as

required in order to practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off)

on the keyboard. You can practice both parts when both the left- and right-parts

are turned off.

Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off. Turn off playback of

the part you wish to practice. When you press one of the buttons to turn play-

back off, the corresponding part indicator in the display turns off and playback

of that part is muted.

(When you first select a song, both the “1” and “2” parts indicators will light,

indicating that both parts are on.)

Lesson 1—Waiting  Learn to play the correct notes.

Lesson 2—Your Tempo   Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing.

Lesson 3—Minus One    Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song.

• Song numbers 10 and 11 are

function demos for perfor-

mance assistant. The les-

son function cannot be used

with them.

• You can also use songs

(only SMF format 0) trans-

ferred from the computer

and saved to flash memory.

(pages 86–88)

• (NP-V80 only) You can also

use songs (only SMF format

0) on a USB flash memory.

(page 28)

• You can turn parts on or off,

even during playback.

NOTE

012

ForElise

Track 1 is unlit

Track 2 is unlit

Track 1 and 2 are unlit

Right-hand lesson

Left-hand lesson

Both-hands lesson

Reference

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Start Lesson 1.

Press the [Waiting] button to start Lesson 1.

Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the next

note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the correct note.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

You can also stop the Lesson mode by pressing the [WAITING] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.

007

Waiting

Keyboard Display

Notation

In this case “r1” indicate that

right-hand lesson 1 has been

selected.

• The evaluation feature can

be turned off via the FUNC-

TION Grade item (page 75).

NOTE

See How You’ve Done

After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the

beginning.

~~~~~~~

~~~~~~

~~~~

Excellent

Very Good

Good

When the lesson song has played all

the way through your performance will

be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good,

Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!”

is the highest evaluation.

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Lesson 2—Your Tempo

Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are

playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on

page 30).

Start Lesson 2.

Press the [Your Tempo] button to start Lesson 2.

Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As

you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until

eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

You can also stop the Lesson mode by pressing the [YOUR TEMPO] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.

007

YourTemp

Keyboard Display

Notation

In this case “r2” indicate that

right-hand lesson 2 has been

selected.

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Lesson 3—Minus One

Here’s where you can perfect your technique.

The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the

song.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on

page 30).

Start Lesson 3.

Press the [Minus One] button to start Lesson 3.

Play the note shown in the display.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

You can also stop the Lesson mode by pressing the [MINUS ONE] button.

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn

Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeat-

edly practice a section you find difficult.

Press the [REPEAT&LEARN] button during a lesson.

The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed

the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will con-

tinue up to the point at which you pressed the [REPEAT&LEARN] button, and then

jump back four measures and repeat again after a count-in. This process will repeat,

so all you have to do is press the [REPEAT&LEARN] button when you make a mis-

take in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right. Press the button

again to return to the normal lesson mode.

007

MinusOne

Keyboard Display

Notation

In this case “r3” indicate that

right-hand lesson 3 has been

selected.

• You can change the number

of measures the Repeat and

learn function jumps back

by pressing a number button

[1]–[9] during repeat play-

back.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

The Easy Way to Play Piano

This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play

along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making

lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good!

So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some

musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning!

Performance assistant technology offers two selectable types. Select the type that pro-

duces the best results for you.

 Chord........................No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical,

well-balanced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom,

allowing you to play anything with both your left and right

hands.

 Chord/Free ...............If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with

left-hand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies

to only the left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to

easily play chords to support the melody you are playing with

your right hand.

Split Point

Play your own melody

with the right hand.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Using the Performance Assistant technology

CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands

Try out the performance assistant technology using the preset song “Ave Maria.”

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be displayed. You

can use the dial or other selection controls to select a different song.

For this example try selecting the “010 Ave Maria”.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the CHORD type.

Press the [FUNCTION] button, then press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to select the performance assistant technology

item “PAT Type”. “PAT Type” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then

the currently selected performance assistant technology type will be displayed.

Select the Chord type by using the dial.

• Select and Listen to a Song

(page 26)

NOTE

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button

to turn the function on or off.

CHORD

PAT Type

Select CHORD

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing the

basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the fifth measure.

Play on the keyboard.

Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both hands. You

can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. Performance

assistant technology will make sure that the notes will come out as if they were

played according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assis-

tant technology will continue to “correct” the notes that you play.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assis-

tant technology feature off.

AfterBefore

• The score for Ave Maria is

provided in the separate

Data List.

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

CHD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only

Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne.

Select the song “011 Nocturne”.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assis-

tant technology feature on.

The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the CHD/FREE type.

Press the [FUNCTION] button, then press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to select the performance assistant technology

item “PAT Type”. “PAT Type” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the

currently selected performance assistant technology type will be displayed.

Select the CHD/FREE type by using the dial.

• Select and Listen to a Song

(page 26)

NOTE

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button

to turn the function on or off.

CHORD

PAT Type

Select CHD/FREE

CHD/FREE

PAT Type

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin. Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the

ninth measure.

Play on the keyboard.

Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with your left

hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds. When you get used

to playing the left hand part, refer to step 2 on the next page and try adding the

right-hand part.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assis-

tant technology feature off.

• The score for Nocturne is

provided in the separate

Data List.

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Next try playing a different preset song.

The procedure is the same as steps 1–3 for playing Ave Maria

(page 35). Select any song.

To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a

song that includes chord data.

Select a song that includes chord data, referring to the Song List in the separate

Data List.

Press the [START/STOP] button to start song playback, then

play freely referring to the description below.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assis-

tant technology feature off.

• Songs transferred to the

instrument from a computer

can also be used with the

performance assistant tech-

nology as long as they

include the required chord

data. If a song includes the

required data, the chords

are shown on the right side

of the display.

NOTE

To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration,

simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do).

How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to performance assis-

tant technology!

Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results.

Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any

other combination.

Sounds like

you’re playing

the right notes!

You will get even better results

if you match your left-hand

rhythm to the rhythm of the

chord indicator in the display.

Play alternately with the

left and right hands.

Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 1.

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 2.

Play 1 note at a time with your right

hand (for example: index finger 

middle finger  ring finger).

Play alternately with the left

and right hands—type 3.

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Play Using the Music Database

You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best

voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate

style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for

the ideal combination of sounds and style!

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

A Music Database name will appear in the display.

Select a Music Database.

Referring to the Music Database List in the separate Data List, use the dial to

select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you

intend to play.

For this example select the “162 Patrol”.

Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right.

The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of

the split point. Refer to page 25 for information about playing chords.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

001

Jude Hey

162

Patrol

Split

Point

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Change a Song’s Style

In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song

with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is nor-

mally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create

totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played.

You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete

change of image.

Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger

The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it.

Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah Chorus” by using the dial.

Press the [START/STOP] button to play it.

As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the song remains

the same.

Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as

well—any songs that include chord data.

Using the Easy Song Arranger

Try switching styles while the song plays back.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The indicator lights when the Easy Song Arranger function is on.

Select a Song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the song you want to arrange. Select the

songs that include the required chord data referring to the Song List in the sepa-

rate Data List.

009

Halleluj

• The score for “Hallelujah

Chorus” is provided in the

separate Data List.

NOTE

Change a Song’s Style

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the

next step while the song is playing.

Select a style.

Press the [STYLE] button and then rotate the dial to hear how the song sounds

with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same

while only the styles change.

You can also press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to change the style’s main

section.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button to turn the function

off.

If the song or style is being played back, first stop the playback, then turn the

Easy Song Arranger function off.

The indicator will go out.

• When playing song numbers

010 and 021 to 030 while

using the Easy Song

Arranger, melody tracks will

be automatically muted and

no melody will sound. In

order to hear the melody

tracks you will need to press

the track buttons [3] to [5].

NOTE

• Because the Easy Song

Arranger uses song data you

can’t specify chords by play-

ing in the accompaniment

range of the keyboard. The

[ACMP ON/ OFF] button will

not function.

• If the time signature of the

song and style are different,

the time signature of the song

will be used.

NOTE

Changing the Melody Voice

You can change the song’s melody voice while the Easy Song Arranger is

on.

Press the [VOICE] button once to display the name of the current melody

voice. Use the dial to select a different voice, then press and hold the

[VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” will

appear in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the newly selected

voice has replaced the song’s original melody voice.

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Record Your Own Performance

You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031

through 035. The recorded song can be played back on the instrument.

Recording

Press the [REC] button.

You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again (Track 1

stop flashing).

Start recording.

When you play the keyboard, recording will begin.

Stop recording.

Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes the data to the

User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.)

To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button.

• If all User Songs (Song

numbers 031–035) contain

recorded data, Song 031

will automatically be

selected. In this case, you

will record over and erase

any previous data in Song

031, so be careful that you

won’t be erasing any mate-

rial you want to keep!

• Accompaniment cannot be

turned on or off once the

[REC] button is pressed.

NOTICE

NOTE

031

User 1

001

The lowest-numbered unrecorded User

Song (Song numbers 031–035) avail-

able for recording is displayed. If you

want to select the Song you will be

recording, select the desired Song

number by using the dial.

Flashes

Track 1 is automati-

cally selected

Flashes

• After you’ve selected the

desired User Song for

recording, you can select a

Style to be recorded as well.

To do this, press the [STYLE]

button and select the Style

number while the ACMP

indication is on.

NOTE

• Never attempt to turn the

power off when a “Writ-

ing!” message is shown in

the display. Doing so can

damage the flash memory

and result in a loss of data.

NOTICE

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Recording to a specified track

Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user

song number (031–035) you want to record to.

Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selec-

tion on the display.

 Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the

[REC] button.

Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.

The selected tracks will flash in the display.

• Up to approximately 10,000

notes can be recorded for

the five user songs if you

record only to the melody

tracks. Up to approximately

5,500 chord changes can

be recorded for the five user

songs if you record only to

the style track.

NOTE

Recordable Data

You can record up to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord)

track. Each track can be recorded individually.

 Melody Track [1]–[5]............... Record the melody parts.

 Style Track [A].........................Records the chord part.

Track Mute

This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back

while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 71).

Melody Chords

Specify track(s)

and record

Tra ck

Track

Tra ck

Style

Track

031

User 1

Rotate the dial to select a song

number between 031 and 035.

• If you record to a track that

contains previously-

recorded data the previ-

ous data will be overwritten

and lost.

• Style accompaniment is

automatically turned on

when you select the style

track [A] for recording.

• Style accompaniment can-

not turned on or off while

recording is in progress.

NOTICE

NOTE

rEC

User 1

001

Track 1 and Style

Track will flash

Press and

hold

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual

Reference

 Record a Melody track

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the

[REC] button.

The selected track will flash in the display.

To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time.

Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button.

When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the

recorded track numbers in the display will light.

• If style accompaniment is on

and track [A] has not yet

been recorded, the style

track [A] will automatically

be selected for recording

when a melody track is

selected. If you only want to

record a melody track, be

sure to turn the style track

[A] off.

NOTE

rEC

User 1

001

Track 1 will flash

• If the memory becomes full

during recording a warning

message will appear and

recording will stop automati-

cally. Use the song clear or

track clear (page 47) func-

tion to delete unwanted data

and make more room avail-

able for recording, then do

the recording again.

• If you want to record only the

rhythm (percussion) part,

press the [START/STOP]

button to play just the

rhythm, then add the section

change by pressing the

[INTO/ENDING/rit.] button or

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

NOTE

003

rEC

User 1

Current measure

Recording

starts

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual

Reference

When the recording is done ...

To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button.

 To Play Back a User Song

User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 26).

1 Press the [SONG] button.

2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial to select the

user song (031–035) you want to play.

3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.

To Record Other Tracks

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks.

By selecting an unrecorded track—track buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can

record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the play-

back tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute previously

recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while

recording new tracks.

To Re-record a Track

Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal

way.

The new material will overwrite the previous data.

Data Recording Limitations

• The split voice cannot be recorded.

• The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes

made during the song will not be recorded.

reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume,

tempo

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs

This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).

Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–035)

you want to clear.

Press and hold the track [1] button for longer than a second

while holding the track [A] button.

A confirmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A confirmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-/NO] button.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the song.

The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song

is being cleared.

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song

This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–035)

you want to clear.

Press and hold the track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to

the track you want to clear for longer than a second.

A confirmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A confirmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-/NO] button.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the track.

The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track

is being cleared.

• If you only want to clear a

specific track from a user

song use the Track Clear

function.

NOTE

YES

ClrUser1

Press and

hold

Hold for longer

than a second.

YES

ClrTr1

Hold for longer than a second.

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-

tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 32 complete setups can be saved

(8 banks of four setups each).

Saving to the Registration Memory

Set the panel controls as required—select a voice, accompani-

ment style, etc.

Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear

in the display when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a bank num-

ber from 1 to 8.

Press one of the REGIST MEMORY buttons [1] to [4] while hold-

ing the [MEMORY/BANK] button to store the current panel set-

tings to the specified registration memory.

Up to 32 presets (eight

banks of four each)

can be memorized.

Memory 1 Memory 2

8 Banks

Memory 3 Memory 4

Bank

Bank number

• Data cannot be saved to the

registration memory during

song playback.

NOTE

• If you select a Registration

Memory number that

already contains data, the

previous data is deleted

and overwritten by the new

data.

• Do not turn off the power

while saving settings to the

registration memory, other-

wise the data may be dam-

aged or lost.

NOTICE

Writing!

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Recalling a Registration Memory

Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear

in the display when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you

want to recall.

Press one of the REGIST MEMORY buttons [1] to [4] containing

the settings you want to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY

number appears in the display for a few seconds. The panel

controls will be instantly set accordingly.

Bank

Bank number

REGIST 1

Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory

Style settings*

Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo

Voice settings

Main Voice setting

(Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level),

Dual Voice settings

(Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level,

Split Voice settings

(Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level)

Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain

Arpeggio settings (NP-V80 only)

Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF, Arpeggio Quantize, Arpeggio Volume, Arpeggio Pedal

Harmony settings

Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume

Other settings

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range

* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features.

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Backup and Initialization

Backup

The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off.

If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation “Backup Clear” as explained below.

Initialization

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The

following initialization procedures are provided.

Backup Clear

To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory turn the power on by pressing

the [ ](Standby/On) switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard.

The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored.

“Backup Clear” does not delete the files transferred from the computer. If you want

to delete the files, see “Deleting Files” below.

Deleting Files

To clear song and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory

from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [ ](Standby/On) switch while

simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest

black keys.

• You can save the settings as

backup data to your com-

puter, by using the Musicsoft

Downloader (MSD) soft-

ware. Refer to the section

“Transfer a backup file from

the instrument to a com-

puter” on page 88.

NOTE

The Backup Parameters

• User Songs

• Style Number 166(NP-V80), Style Number 161(NP-V60)

• Touch Response on/off

• Registration Memory

• FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,

Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo

Group, Demo Play, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type

• When you execute the

Flash Clear operation, data

you have purchased will

also be cleared. Be sure to

save data you want to keep

to a computer.

NOTICE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Handy Performance Features

Adding Reverb

Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type

ambience. When you select a style or song the opti-

mum reverb type for the voice used is automatically

selected. If you want to select a different reverb type,

use the procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select “Reverb”.

“Reverb” will appear in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the currently selected reverb type will

be displayed.

Use the dial to select a reverb type.

You can check how the selected reverb type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data

List for information about the available reverb

types.

Adding Chorus

The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar

to many of the same voices being played in unison.

When you select a style or song the optimum chorus

type for the voice used is automatically selected. If

you want to select a different chorus type, use the pro-

cedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select “Chorus”.

“Chorus” will appear in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the currently selected chorus type will

be displayed.

Use the dial to select a chorus type.

You can check how the selected chorus type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data

List for information about the available chorus

types.

Adjusting the Reverb Send Level

You can individually adjust the amount of

reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and

split voices. (See page 74).

Reverb

Hall2

The currently selected

reverb type

Adjusting the Chorus Send Level

You can individually adjust the amount of cho-

rus that is applied to the main, dual, and split

voices. (See page 74).

Chorus

Chorus1

The currently selected

chorus type

Handy Performance Features

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Panel Sustain

This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use

it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all

times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain

function does not affect split voice.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select “Sustain”.

The current setting is displayed.

Use the dial to turn panel sustain on or

off.

Panel Sustain will be added to the notes you play

on the keyboard when the Panel Sustain is on. To

turn it off, select “oFF”.

Pitch Controls (Transpose)

The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up

or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone incre-

ments.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Transpose item.

Use the dial to set the transpose value

between -12 and +12 as required.

• The sustain of some voices may not be markedly

affected when the panel sustain function is turned on.

oFF

Sustain

NOTE

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

Transpos

NOTE

Handy Performance Features

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Pitch Controls (Tuning)

The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up

or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent incre-

ments (100 cents = 1 semitone).

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Tuning item.

Use the dial to set the tuning value

between -100 and +100 as required.

Setting the Metronome Time Sig-

nature

In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.

Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/

OFF] button for longer than a second to

select the number of beats per measure

function “TimesigN”.

Use the dial to select the number of

beats per measure.

A chime will sound on the first beat of each mea-

sure while the other beats will click. All beats

will simply click with no chime at the beginning

of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”.

The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5

for this example.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the beat length function

“TimesigD”.

The currently selected beat length will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select the beat length.

Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or

16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th

note). Select 8 for this example.

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

000

Tuning

NOTE

• The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style

or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be

changed while a style or song is playing.

TimesigN

Hold for longer

than a second.

Number of beats per measure.

NOTE

TimesigD

The length of one beat.

Handy Performance Features

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Metronome Volume

item.

Use the dial to set the metronome vol-

ume as required.

Pitch Bend

The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch

variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the

wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower

the pitch. You can change the amount of pitch bend

produced by the wheel, as described on page 74.

One Touch Setting

Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a

song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Set-

ting feature automatically selects a well-balanced

voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply

select voice number “000” to activate this feature.

100

MtrVol

Metronome volume

Handy Performance Features

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Select an EQ Setting for the Best

Sound

Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are pro-

vided to give you the best possible sound when listen-

ing through different reproduction systems—the

instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an

external speaker system.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in the

display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the master EQ type function

“MasterEQ”.

“MasterEQ” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, then the currently selected EQ type will

be displayed.

Use the dial to select the desired Master

EQ setting.

Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2

are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in

speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings

4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speak-

ers.

Auto Power Off Setup

The Auto Power Off function automatically turns the

instrument’s power off if it is not operated for a speci-

fied period of time. The amount of time that will

elapse before the power is automatically turned off

can be set from 5 to 30 minutes, in 5-minute incre-

ments.

Turn the power off, then press and hold

the [ ](Standby/On) switch until

“AutoOff” appears on the display.

Use the dial to select the desired Auto

Power Off interval (05–30). Select “Off”

if you want to disable the Auto Power

Off function.

MasterEQ

Speakerl

The currently selected

master EQ type.

oFF

AutoOff

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Voice Settings

Voice Editing

Create original voices by editing the many available

voice parameters. By editing the various parameters

available you can create new voices that best suit your

musical needs.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in the

display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the item you want to edit.

You can individually adjust the voice setting (Vol-

ume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level)

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

Refer to the Functions on page 74 for details.

Use the dial to set the value.

Edited parameters can be saved to registration

memory (page 48). If you select a different key-

board voice the parameters will be reset and the

ideal settings for the selected voice will be auto-

matically recalled.

064

M.Volume

Category Setting Display

Range/

Settings

Main

Voice

Volume M.Volume 000–127

Octave M.Octave -2–+2

Pan M.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127

Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127

Dual

Voice

Voice D.Voice

000–500 (NP-V80)

000–489 (NP-V60)

Volume D.Volume 000–127

Octave D.Octave -2–+2

Pan D.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127

Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127

Split

Voice

Voice S.Voice

000–500 (NP-V80)

000–489 (NP-V60)

Volume S.Volume 000–127

Octave S.Octave -2–+2

Pan S.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127

Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127

Voice Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Selecting a Dual Voice

Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second.

“D.VOICE” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, then the currently selected dual voice

will be displayed.

Select the desired Dual Voice by using

the dial.

Selecting a Split Voice

Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second.

“S.Voice” will appear in the display for a few sec-

onds, then the currently selected split voice will

be displayed.

Select the desired Split Voice by using

the dial.

D.Voice

121

Marimba

The currently

selected dual voice

S.Voice

047

FngrBass

The currently selected

split voice

Voice Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Touch Response Sensitivity

(NP-V80)

You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics

in four steps.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in the

display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the Touch Sensitivity item

“TouchSns”.

“TouchSns” will appears in the display for a few

seconds, and the currently selected touch sensitiv-

ity will be displayed.

Use the dial in response to keyboard

dynamics to select a touch sensitivity

setting between 1 and 4.

Higher values produce greater (easier) volume

variation in response to keyboard dynamics— i.e.

greater sensitivity. When touch sensitivity is set

to 4 (Off), all notes will be played at the same

volume no matter how hard or softly you play the

keys.

Touch Response Sensitivity

(NP-V60)

When touch response is on you can adjust the key-

board’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.

Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to

turn touch response on.

The [TOUCH ON/OFF] button alternately turns

touch response on and off.

The touch response icon will appear in the dis-

play when touch response is on.

When touch response is set to off, all notes will

be played at the same volume no matter how hard

or softly you play the keys.

Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF]

button for longer than a second so that

the Touch Sensitivity item appears.

“TouchSns” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, and the currently selected touch sensitiv-

ity will be displayed.

Use the dial in response to keyboard

dynamics to select a touch sensitivity

setting between 1 and 3.

Higher values produce greater (easier) volume

variation in response to keyboard dynamics—i.e.

greater sensitivity.

• The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.

TouchSns

Medium

Touch Sensitivity

NOTE

• The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.

Touch response icon

TouchSns

Medium

Touch Sensitivity

Hold for longer

than a second.

NOTE

Voice Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Harmony

This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.

Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button

to turn Harmony feature on.

To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY

ON/OFF] button again.

When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] but-

ton to turn this feature on, the appropriate har-

mony type for the currently selected main voice is

automatically selected.

Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/OFF]

button for longer than a second so that

the Harmony Type item appears.

“HarmType” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, and the currently selected harmony type

will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different

harmony type.

Use the dial to select a harmony type.

Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data

List for information about the available harmony

types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony

function. The effect and operation of each Har-

mony Type is different-refer to the below section

“How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the

Effect Type List for details.

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function

Settings (page 75).

When harmony is on the

harmony icon will appear

in the display.

HarmType

Trio

The currently selected

harmony type

Hold for longer

than a second.

• The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice,

not to Dual or Split Voices.

• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce

no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on

(ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony type 01 to 05

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in

the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard

when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 23).

• Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)

Hold down two keys.

• Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)

Keep holding down the keys.

• Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)

Keep holding down the keys.

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Arpeggio Settings (NP-V80 only)

Controlling Arpeggio Volume with

Keyboard Dynamics

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the arpeggio velocity function

“ARP Velo”.

“ARP Velo” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, then the currently selected arpeggio

velocity setting will be displayed.

Use the dial to select “2 Thru”.

When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio vol-

ume is the same regardless of changes in key-

board velocity.

Synchronizing an arpeggio to a

tempo of Style or Song

Adjust the arpeggio quantization to synchronize the

arpeggio to a Style or Song.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the “Quantize”.

“Quantize” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, then the currently selected Quantize

value will be displayed.

Use the dial to select the appropriate

quantize value (1/8, 1/16 or OFF) as

required.

A setting of “1/8” will align off-beat notes to the

nearest 4th note, a setting of “1/16” will align off-

beat notes to the nearest 8th note, and a setting of

“OFF” will result in no quantization.

The default arpeggio quantize setting depends on

the arpeggio type.

ARP Velo

Original

The currently selected

arpeggio velocity.

Thru

Quantize

1/8

The currently selected

arpeggio quantization.

Arpeggio Settings (NP-V80 only)

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Holding the arpeggio Playback

Arpeggio playback can be made to continue after the

note has been released by pressing a footswitch con-

nected to the SUSTAIN jack. Arpeggio playback will

stop when the footswitch is released. Connect a foot-

switch (page 11), then assign the function to the foot-

switch as per the instructions below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select “Pdl Func”.

“Pdl Func” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, then the currently selected function

assigned to the footswitch will be displayed.

Use the dial to select “Arp Hold”.

If you want to restore the footswitch function to

sustain, select “Sustain”. If you want to use both

hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus”.

The sustain function affects the main and dual

voices only. Split voices will not be affected.

Pdl Func

The function currently

assigned to the footswitch.

Sustain

Arp Hold

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 22 of

the Quick Guide.

Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-

dure, and more.

Pattern Variation (Sections)

The instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompa-

niment to match the song you are playing.

Press the [STYLE] button and then

select a style.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to

turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

synchro start on.

INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the

main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

MAIN section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats

indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and

B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.

Fill-in section

This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.

ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops auto-

matically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Intro Main A/B

Ending Auto fill

Appears when Auto

Accompaniment is on.

Synchro Start

When the synchro start standby mode is

engaged, style playback will begin as soon as

you play a chord in the accompaniment range

of the keyboard. You can disengage the syn-

chro-start standby mode by pressing the

[SYNC START] button again.

Beat arrows will flash

when the synchro

start standby mode

is engaged

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

You’re now ready to play the intro.

As soon as you play a chord with your

left hand, the Intro of the selected Style

starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown

below). For information on how to enter chords,

see “Chords” on page 25.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into

the selected main section A/B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

This switches to the ending section.

When the ending is finished, the auto accompani-

ment stops automatically. You can have the ending

gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the end-

ing is playing back.

MAIN A

The name of the selected section—

MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed.

INTRO≥A

Split point

Accompani-

ment range

FILL A≥B

Synchro Stop

When this function is selected the accompani-

ment style will only play while you are playing

chords in the accompaniment range of the key-

board. Style playback will stop when you

release the keys. To turn the function on, press

the [SYNC STOP] button.

ENDING

Appears when the

synchro-stop function

is engaged.

The style will play

while you are playing

the keys

Style playback will

stop when you

release the keys

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Changing the tempo of the Style

Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or

slow.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call

up the Tempo setting in the display

after selecting a Style.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 011

to 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a

Style.

You can change the tempo during style playback

by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice.

Adjusting the Style Volume

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style func-

tion.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Style Volume item.

Use the dial to set the style volume

between 000 and 127.

090

Tempo

Current Tempo value

100

StyleVol

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Setting the Split Point

The initial default split point is key number 54 (the

F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using

the procedure described below.

Press the [STYLE] button.

Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for

longer than a second so that the Split

point item appears.

Use the dial to set the split point to any

key from E0(028) through G6(103).

Tap S tar t

You can start the style by simply tapping the

[TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times

for time signatures in 4, and three times for time sig-

natures in 3. You can change the tempo during style

playback by pressing the button just twice.

• When you change the split point the auto-accompani-

ment split point also changes.

• The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.

• You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[ ] buttons to locate the item (page 74).

054

SplitPnt

Hold for longer

than a second.

Split point

Split point (54 : F#2)

Split voice

Main voice

NOTE

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Play a Style with Chords but No

Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)

When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon

is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play

chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the

keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the

accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompani-

ment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by

the instrument can be used (page 25).

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the

style function, then press the [ACMP ON/

OFF] button to turn the auto accompani-

ment on.

Playing Styles Using the Entire

Keyboard

In “Play Along with a Style” on page 23 we described

a method of playing styles in which chords were

detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By

making the settings described below, however, chord

detection for style accompaniment occurs over the

entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more

dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords

played in the normal way (page 25) can be detected.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the function “Chord Fin-

gering”.

“ChdFing” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, then the currently selected Chord Fin-

gering type will be displayed.

Use the dial to select 2 “FullKbd”.

153

PnoBoogi

Appears when auto accompaniment is on

Accompani-

ment range

ChdFing

FullKbd

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Loading Style Files (NP-V60)

This instrument features 160 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and others

that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style number 161 and

used in the same way as the internal styles.

In order to use the style file load function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the

instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 86

(“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”).

The procedure described below loads a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instru-

ment into style number 161.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in the

display

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the style file load function “Sff

Load”.

After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable

style file will appear in the display.

If multiple loadable style files have been trans-

ferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or

the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in

sequence (100 files max.).

Execute the load operation.

With the name of the style file you want to load

shown in the display, press the number [0] button.

A confirmation message for the load

operation will appear. Press the [+/YES]

button to actually load the file.

Sff Load

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is

ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

Press and hold the [MINUS ONE] button

for longer than a second.

As an example, we’ll learn how to play a

GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Referring

to the illustration, press the G key in the

CHORD ROOT area (no sound will be

produced). The root note you set is

shown in the display.

Referring to the illustration, press the

M7 (major seventh) key in the CHORD

TYPE area (no sound will be produced).

The notes you should play for the speci-

fied chord (root note and chord type) are

shown in the display, both as notation

and in the keyboard diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press

the [+]/[-] buttons.

Try playing a chord in the auto accom-

paniment section of the keyboard,

checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly,

a bell sound signals your success and

the chord name in the display flash.

Highest key

Dict.

Hold for longer

than a second.

001

Dict.

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually

indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers

to C major. However, when specifying major chords

here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the

root note.

001

Dict.

Chord name (root and type)Notation of chord

Individual notes of chord (keyboard)

NOTE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Song Settings

BGM Playback

With the default setting only a few of the internal

songs are played back and repeated when the [DEMO/

BGM] button is pressed. This setting can be changed

so that all internal songs are played, or all songs trans-

ferred to the instrument from a computer are played.

Five playback group settings are provided. Simply

select the one that suits your needs.

Press and hold the [DEMO/BGM] button

for longer than a second.

“DemoGrp” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, then the currently selected repeat play-

back target will be displayed.

Use the dial to select a repeat playback

group from the table below.

Random Song Playback

The random play mode causes the songs in the group

selected for BGM playback to be played back in ran-

dom order.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select “PlayMode”.

“PlayMode” will appear in the display for a few

seconds, then the currently selected repeat play-

back mode will be displayed.

You cannot select the repeat playback mode when

“Demo” is selected as the repeat playback group.

Use the dial to select “Random”.

If you want to restore the normal playback mode,

select “Normal”.

Demo Preset songs 001–008

Preset All preset songs

User All User songs

Download

All songs transferred from a

computer

USB

(NP-V80 only)

All songs stored on a USB

flash memory connected to the

instrument.

DemoGrp

Hold for longer

than a second.

PlayMode

Song Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Changing the tempo of the Song

Songs can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or

slow.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call

up the Tempo setting in the display

after selecting a Song.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 011

to 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a

Song.

You can change the tempo during song playback

by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice.

Song Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Song Volume item.

Use the dial to set the song volume

between 000 and 127.

090

Tempo

Current Tempo value

• Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.

100

SongVol

Song volume

NOTE

Song Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

A-B Repeat

You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start

point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback.

Play the song (page 26) and press the

[A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning

of the section you want to repeat (the

“A” point).

Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-

ond time at the end of the section you

want to repeat (the “B” point).

The specified A-B section of the song

will now play repeatedly.

You can stop repeat playback at any time by

pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.

Muting Independent Song Tracks

Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the

song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You

can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on

the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other

than the ones you want to listen to.

To mute a track, press the appropriate track button

(TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same button a

second time to disengage track muting.

• The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-

measure increments.

• The current measure number is shown in the display

during playback.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning

of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before start-

ing playback of the song.

NOTE

Track number off—Track is

muted or contains no data

Track number on—Track will playback

Song Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Tap S tar t

You can start the song by simply tapping the

[TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times

for time signatures in 4, and three times for time sig-

natures in 3. You can change the tempo during song

playback by pressing the button just twice.

Change the Melody Voice

You can change a song’s melody voice to any other

voice you prefer.

Select the song and play it.

Rotate the dial to select the voice you

want to listen to after pressing the

[VOICE] button.

Press the [VOICE] button for longer

than a second.

“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the

display for a few seconds, indicating

that the voice selected in step #2 has

replaced the song’s original melody

voice.

• You cannot change the melody voice of a user song.

NOTE

050

Strings

Hold for longer

than a second.

SONG MEL

Owner’s Manual

Reference

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-

ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-

tion list starting on the opposite page.

When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display

name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required.

Selecting and Setting Functions

Find the function you want to set in the

list that begins on pages 74, 75.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Select a function.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as

many times as necessary until the function’s dis-

play name appears in the display.

Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or

the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the

selected function as required.

In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-

tion of the selected function, and the [-] will can-

cel the selection.

Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon

as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on

page 50 for information on the function settings that

are stored on the instrument.

To restore all initial factor default settings perform the

“Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initializa-

tion” section on page 50.

100

StyleVol

Transpos

The selected function.

Direct

numeric entry.

Press simultane-

ously to recall the

default setting.

• Increment

value by 1.

• YES

• Decrement

value by 1.

•NO

The Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Function Setting List

Category Settings Display Range/Settings Description

Volume

Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.

Overall

Transpose Transpos -12–12

Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone incre-

ments.

Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.

Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.

Split Point SplitPnt

028–103

(E0–G6)

Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the

Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split

(lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and

Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the

same value.

Touch Sensitivity TouchSns

1(Soft),

2(Medium),

3(Hard),

4(Off)(NP-V80 only)

When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of

the feature.

Fingering Chord ChdFing

1(Multi),

2(FullKbd)

Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both

standard chords and easy chords played to the left of the split

point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode standard chords

played anywhere on the keyboard will be detected, and the

notes played will be sound as well.

Main Voice

Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.

Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.

Pan M.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo

image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left;

the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right.

Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Dual Voice

Voice D.Voice

000–500(NP-V80)

000–489(NP-V60)

Selects the Dual voice.

Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.

Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.

Pan D.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo

image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left;

the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right.

Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Split Voice

Voice S.Voice

000–500(NP-V80)

000–489(NP-V60)

elects the Split voice.

Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.

Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.

Pan S.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo

image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left;

the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right.

Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Effect

Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10).

Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05).

Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF

Determines whether or not panel sustain is always applied to

the MAIN/DUAL voices. Panel sustain is applied continuously

when ON, or not applied when OFF.

Master EQ Type MasterEQ

Speaker1,

Speaker2,

Headphone,

Line Out1,

Line Out2

Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum

sound in different listening situations.

The Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Harmony

Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type.

Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

Arpeggio

(NP-V80 only)

Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–50 Determines the Arpeggio type.

Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo

1 (Original),

2 (Thru)

Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback.

Arpeggio Quan-

tize

Quantize OFF, 1/8, 1/16 Synchronizes arpeggio playback to a Style or Song.

Arpeggio Pedal Pdl Func

1(Sustain)/

2(Arp Hold)/

3(Hold+Sus)

Determines the pedal function in the arpeggio mode.

PAT

Performance

assistant technol-

ogy Type

PAT Type

CHORD(1),

CHD/FREE(2)

Determines the performance assistant technology type.

Style File

Load

(NP-V60)

Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style file.

PC PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer.

MIDI

Local On/Off Local ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the

internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF).

External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the inter-

nal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON).

Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF

Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instru-

ment is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF

Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB

TO HOST or not (OFF) during Style playback.

Song Out SongOut ON/OFF

Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB

TO HOST or not (OFF) during Song playback.

Initial Send InitSend YES/NO

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer.

Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel.

Metronome

Time Signature

Numerator

TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature

Denominator

TimesigD

Half note,

Quarter note,

Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

Sets the length of each metronome beat.

Metronome Vol-

ume

MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson

Lesson Track (R) R-Part

GuideTrack

1–16, OFF

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 trans-

ferred from a computer, or songs stored on a USB flash mem-

ory connected to the instrument.

Lesson Track (L) L-Part

GuideTrack

1–16, OFF

termines the guide track number for your left hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 trans-

ferred from a computer, or songs stored on a USB flash mem-

ory connected to the instrument.

Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.

Demo

Demo Group DemoGrp

1(Demo)/

2(Preset)/

3(User)/

4(Download)

Determines the repeat playback group.

Demo Playmode PlayMode

1(Normal)/2(Ran-

dom)

Determines the repeat playback mode.

Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this

is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/

BGM] button is pressed.

Power Save Auto Power Off AutoOff OFF, 5–30

Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s

power is automatically turned off.

Language

(NP-V80 only)

Language Language Japanese/English Sets the file name display language.

Category Settings Display Range/Settings Description

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only)

USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB flash mem-

ory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, registered settings can be

saved from or loaded into the instrument. In this section we’ll look at the procedures

for setting up and formatting USB flash memory devices, as well as for saving and

loading data to and from them. Before using a USB device, read through the “Precau-

tions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 77.

File Control Functions

Connect a USB flash memory to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful

to insert it with the proper orientation.

Wait for confirmation that the USB flash

memory has been properly mounted.

The file control function mode.

Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button until the

display changes. When the display changes you

will be able to access the file control functions.

If the file control functions are accessed while an

unformatted USB flash memory is connected to

the instrument, the “Format” function will auto-

matically be selected.

Use the category [ ] and [ ] buttons to select

one of the file control functions listed below.

To exit from the file control function mode press

the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION],

or [GRAND PIANO] button. You can also exit

from the file control function mode by selecting

“EXIT” from the menu and pressing the [0] but-

ton (page 83).

Usb

001

LiveGPno

001

Usb

(Flashing)

(Displayed for 2

seconds)

(Measure number, etc.)

Mounting

Mounted

Normal

display

File control function Reference page

Format 78

Saving User Files 79

Saving User Songs as SMF Files 80

Loading User Files 81

Loading Style Files 81

Deleting User Files 82

Deleting SMF Song Files 82

Exit 83

Load STY

Hold for more

than 3 seconds

Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only)

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Precautions when using the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal

This instrument features a built-in [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device

to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with

care. Follow the important precautions below.

Compatible USB devices

• USB storage devices (flash memory and floppy disk

drive)

The instrument does not necessarily support all com-

mercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot

guarantee operation of USB devices that you pur-

chase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with

this instrument, please visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

Connecting USB device

• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on

the device is appropriate and that it is connected in

the proper direction.

• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 stan-

dard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage

device with the instrument. However, note that the

transfer speed is that of USB 1.1.

Using USB Storage Devices

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage

device, you can save data you’ve created to the con-

nected device, as well as read data from the connected

device.

The number of USB storage device

to be used

Only one USB storage devices can be connected to

the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to for-

mat the device/media. If so, execute the Format opera-

tion (page 78).

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently

erased, apply the write-protect provided with each

storage device or media. If you are saving data to the

USB storage device, make sure to disable write-pro-

tect.

Connecting/removing USB storage

device

Before removing the media from the device, make

sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as

in the Save and Delete operations).

• For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer

to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

• Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse

cannot be used.

NOTE

• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the

instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

• The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not

contain important data.

• Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB stor-

age device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too

often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instru-

ment “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is

accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and

Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device

(shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB

connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and

do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may

corrupt the data on either or both devices.

NOTE

NOTICE

Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only)

Owner’s Manual

Reference

This section describes operation of the

file control functions after you have

engaged the file control function mode.

Format a USB Flash Memory

USB flash memory devices must be properly format-

ted before they can be used with this instrument.

USB flash memory save, delete, and format opera-

tions can only be performed when the instrument is

being powered from an AC adapter. These operations

cannot be performed using battery power.

Select the Format function.

Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many

times as necessary until the “Format?” function

appears.

Execute the Format function.

Press the [0] button. A confirmation message will

appear. Press the [0] button a second time to exe-

cute the Format operation, or press the [-] button

to cancel the operation.

Wait until a message indicating completion of the

formatting operation appears.

Exit from the file control function mode.

Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNC-

TION], or [GRAND PIANO] button.

Messages may appear on the display during file

control procedures to aid in smooth operation. Refer

to the Message List on page 83 for details.

• No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played while the

file control display is showing, and only buttons related to file

control operations will be active.

• The file control display will not appear during:

• Style or song playback.

• Lessons.

• USB flash memory read operations.

Basic File Operation

If multiple files are available for selection, use the

dial to select the desired file.

Press the [0] button to confirm the selection. The [0]

button also executes the selected function. The [-]

button cancels the selected function.

NOTE

• Confirm file selection

• Execute

• Cancel

• If a USB flash memory that contains data is formatted as

described below, the data will be erased. Make sure that a

USB flash memory to be formatted contains no important

data before carrying out the formatting procedure.

• The Format operation cannot be cancelled during

execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during formatting.

NOTICE

Format?

NOTICE

Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only)

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving User Files

“User files” containing 5 user songs, style 166, and

the registration memory can be saved to USB flash

memory. User files have a “.usr” file extension (the

extension does not appear on the instrument’s dis-

play).

USB flash memory save, delete, and format opera-

tions can only be performed when the instrument is

being powered from an AC adapter. These operations

cannot be performed using battery power.

Select the Save User File function.

Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many

times as necessary until the “Save USR” function

appears.

Specify the target user file.

When the [0] button is pressed “USERxxx” will

automatically be specified as the target user file

(“xxx” will be a number). If the automatically

specified file is satisfactory, press the [0] button.

The dial can be used to select a different target

file (USER001–USER100) if desired before

pressing the [0] button.

Save the user file.

A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0]

button to execute the save operation, or press the

[-] button to cancel the operation.

User files will be saved in a folder labeled “USER

FILES” which will automatically be created on

the USB flash memory.

Wait until a message indicating completion of the

save operation appears.

Exit from the file control function mode.

Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNC-

TION], or [GRAND PIANO] button.

Overwriting Existing Files

If a file that already contains data is selected as

the target user file, an overwrite confirmation

message will appear.

Save USR

USER001

• The save operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during a save operation.

• The amount of time required to save the file may vary

depending on the condition of the USB flash memory

used.

NOTICE

NOTE

Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only)

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving User Songs as SMF Files

User songs can be converted to SMF (Standard MIDI

File) format and saved to a USB flash memory.

USB flash memory save, delete, and format opera-

tions can only be performed when the instrument is

being powered from an AC adapter. These operations

cannot be performed using battery power.

Select the Save SMF File function.

Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many

times as necessary until the “Save SMF” function

appears.

Select the file to be converted to SMF

format.

When the [0] button is pressed a user song name

will be displayed: “User 1”, for example. If the

displayed user song is the one you want to con-

vert, press the [0] button. The dial can be used to

select a different user song (User 1–5) prior to

pressing the [0] button. The target user song name

will be automatically displayed.

Specify the target user song.

If the automatically specified target user song is

satisfactory, press the [0] button. The dial can be

used to select a different target user song

(SONG001–100) if desired before pressing the

[0] button.

Save the user song.

A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0]

button to execute the save operation, or press the

[-] button to cancel the operation.

User songs will be saved in a folder labeled

“USER FILES” which will automatically be cre-

ated on the USB flash memory.

Wait until a message indicating completion of the

save operation appears.

Exit from the file control function mode.

Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNC-

TION], or [GRAND PIANO] button.

• See page 86 for information on SMF (Standard MIDI File)

files.

NOTE

Save SMF

User 1

Overwriting Existing Song

If a song that already contains data is selected as

the target user song, an overwrite confirmation

message will appear.

• The save operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during a save operation.

• The amount of time required to save the file may vary

depending on the condition of the USB flash memory

used.

SONG001

NOTICE

NOTE

Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only)

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Loading User Files

User files saved to USB flash memory can be loaded

into the instrument’s memory as required.

Select the Load User File function.

Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many

times as necessary until the “Load USR” function

appears.

Select the user file to be loaded.

When the [0] button is pressed user files located

on the USB flash memory will be displayed as

“USERxxx” (“xxx” will be a number). If the ini-

tially selected file is the one you want to load,

press the [0] button. If multiple user files are

available the dial can be used to select a different

user file before pressing the [0] button.

The user file to be loaded must be located inside

the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash

memory. Files located outside that folder will not

be recognized.

Load the user file.

A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0]

button to execute the load operation, or press the

[-] button to cancel the operation.

Wait until a message indicating completion of the

load operation appears.

Exit from the file control function mode.

Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNC-

TION], or [GRAND PIANO] button.

Loading Style Files

A style loaded into style number 166 from either a

USB flash memory or the instrument’s internal mem-

ory can be used in the same way as the internal styles.

If the style is to be loaded from the instrument’s inter-

nal memory, the style file must first be transferred to

the internal memory from a computer (page 87).

Select the Load Style function.

Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many

times as necessary until the “Load STY” function

appears.

Select the style file to be loaded.

When the [0] button is pressed style files located

on the USB flash memory or in the instrument’s

internal memory will be displayed. If the initially

selected file is the one you want to load, press the

[0] button. If multiple files are available the dial

can be used to select a different style file before

pressing the [0] button (100 files max.).

Style files to be loaded from USB flash memory

must be located in the flash memory’s root direc-

tory.

Load the style file.

A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0]

button to execute the load operation, or press the

[-] button to cancel the operation.

Wait until a message indicating completion of the

load operation appears.

Exit from the file control function mode.

Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNC-

TION], or [GRAND PIANO] button.

• When a user file is loaded the instrument’s 5 user songs,

style 166, and registration memory will be overwritten. Save

important data you want to keep to a separate USB flash

memory before loading a user file.

• The load operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during a save operation.

NOTICE

Load USR

NOTICE

• When a style file is loaded, style 166 will be overwritten.

• The load operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during a save operation.

NOTICE

Load STY

NOTICE

Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only)

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Deleting User Files

This procedure deletes user files from a USB flash

memory.

USB flash memory save, delete, and format opera-

tions can only be performed when the instrument is

being powered from an AC adapter. These operations

cannot be performed using battery power.

Select the Delete User File function.

Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many

times as necessary until the “Del USR” function

appears.

Specify the user file to be deleted.

When the [0] button is pressed user files located

on the USB flash memory will be displayed as

“USERxxx” (“xxx” will be a number). If the ini-

tially selected file is the one you want to delete,

press the [0] button. If multiple user files are

available the dial can be used to select a different

user file before pressing the [0] button.

The user file to be deleted must be located inside

the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash

memory. Files located outside that folder will not

be recognized.

Delete the user file.

A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0]

button to execute the delete operation, or press

the [-] button to cancel the operation.

Wait until a message indicating completion of the

delete operation appears.

Exit from the file control function mode.

Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNC-

TION], or [GRAND PIANO] button.

Deleting SMF Song Files

This procedure deletes SMF song files that were cre-

ated on this instrument from a USB flash memory.

USB flash memory save, delete, and format opera-

tions can only be performed when the instrument is

being powered from an AC adapter. These operations

cannot be performed using battery power.

Select the Delete SMF File function.

Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many

times as necessary until the “Del SMF” function

appears.

Specify the SMF file to be deleted.

When the [0] button is pressed SMF song files

located on the USB flash memory will be dis-

played as “SONGxxx” (“xxx” will be a number).

If the initially selected file is the one you want to

delete, press the [0] button. If multiple SMF song

files are available the dial can be used to select a

different user file before pressing the [0] button.

The SMF song file to be deleted must be located

inside the “USER FILES” folder on the USB

flash memory. Files located outside that folder

will not be recognized. Also, the file name must

be “SONGxxx”, where “xxx” is a number.

Delete the SMF song file.

A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0]

button to execute the delete operation, or press

the [-] button to cancel the operation.

Wait until a message indicating completion of the

delete operation appears.

Exit from the file control function mode.

Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNC-

TION], or [GRAND PIANO] button.

• The delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during a save operation.

Del USR

NOTICE

• The delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during a save operation.

Del SMF

NOTICE

Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only)

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Exit From the File Control Function

Mode

To exit from the file control function mode press the

[VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or

[GRAND PIANO] button.

You can also exit from the file control function mode

as follows:

Select the Exit item.

Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many

times as necessary until “Exit?” appears.

Exit.

Press the [0] button to exit from the file control

function mode.

Exit?

Message Comment

Can’t use

Indicates that the file control function is cur-

rently unavailable since the media is being

accessed.

Complet.

Indicates the specified job completion such as

data saving and transmission.

Data Err

Displayed when the user song contains illegal

data.

Disk Ful

Displayed when saving data cannot be exe-

cuted since the media memory becomes full.

Error

Displayed when a file error or operational error

occurs.

File Ful

Indicates that SMF songs cannot be displayed

since the total number of files exceeds the

capacity.

no data There is no data to save in the flash memory.

no file

There is no file to load or delete from the

media.

Communication with the USB device has been

shut down because of the overcurrent to the

USB device. Disconnect the device from the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on the

power of the instrument.

Protect

Displayed when trying to save or delete data on

a protected media, or format a protected

media. Set protect to off and try again.

Unformat

Displayed when connecting an unformatted

media.

UseAdpt

USB flash memory save, delete, and format

operations cannot be performed when the

instrument is being powered from battery. Use

an AC adaptor.

Our

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting to a Computer

This instrument can be connected to a computer to allow transfer of MIDI data or a file.

Connecting a Personal Computer

In order to be able to communicate with and use

instruments connected to your computer, the appropri-

ate driver software must be properly installed on your

computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence

software and similar applications on your computer to

transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI

devices via a USB cable. The USB-MIDI driver is

included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB-

MIDI driver is described on page 91.

Precautions when using the USB TO

HOST terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST

terminal, make sure to observe the following points.

Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and cor-

rupting or losing the data. If the computer or the

instrument freezes, restart the application software or

the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument

off then on again.

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3

meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB TO

HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode

of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, con-

nect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal.

• Execute the following before turning the power to

the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the

USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal.

• Quit any open application software on the com-

puter.

• Make sure that data is not being transmitted

from the instrument. (Data is transmitted when-

ever you play on the keyboard or play back a

song, etc.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument,

you should wait for six seconds or more between

these operations: (1) when turning the power of the

instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately

connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

USB terminal USB TO HOST terminal

USB cable

Instrument

MIDI Basics

If you want to know more about MIDI and how to

use it, refer to this introductory book. MIDI Basics is

available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual

Library at:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

• Connect the instrument to external equipment only after

turning off power for all devices. Then, turn on the power,

first to the instrument, then to the connected external

equipment. Reverse this order when you turn the power

off.

CAUTION

Connecting to a Computer

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and

performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.

MIDI settings

These settings pertain to performance data transmis-

sion and reception.

If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this

may be the most likely cause.

If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being

received from an external device, the song, style, and

metronome functions will not start.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the item you want to

change its value.

Use the dial to select ON or OFF.

PC Mode

A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you

want to transfer performance data between the com-

puter and the instrument. The PC Mode item can con-

veniently make multiple settings for you in one

operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and

OFF.

This setting is not necessary when transferring song or

backup files between the computer and the instru-

ment.

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the PC mode item “PC Mode”.

Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.

Item Display

Range/

Settings

Description

Local Local

ON/

OFF

Local control determines

whether or not notes played

on the instrument are sounded

by its internal tone generator

system: the internal tone gen-

erator is active when local

control is on, and inactive

when local control is off.

External

Clock

ExtClock

ON/

OFF

These settings determine

whether the instrument is syn-

chronized to its own internal

clock (OFF), or to a clock signal

from an external device (ON).

Keyboard

Out

KbdOut

ON/

OFF

These settings determine

whether keyboard performance

data of the instrument is trans-

mitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style

Out

StyleOut

ON/

OFF

These settings determine

whether Style data is transmit-

ted (ON) or not (OFF) during

Style playback.

Song

Out

SongOut

ON/

OFF

These settings determine

whether User Song is trans-

mitted (ON) or not (OFF) dur-

ing Song playback.

PC1 PC2* OFF

Local OFF OFF ON

External Clock ON OFF OFF

Song Out OFF OFF OFF

Style Out OFF OFF OFF

Keyboard Out OFF ON ON

• Although User Songs can be transmitted from the instru-

ment by using the Song Out function, Preset Song data

cannot be transmitted in this way.

oFF

PC mode

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Initial Send

This function lets you send the panel setup data to a

computer. Before you record performance data to a

sequencer application running on your computer, it is

a good idea to first send and record the panel setup

data before the actual performance data.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Initial Send item.

Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to

cancel.

Transferring Data between the

Computer and Instrument

Song and Style files residing on a computer or the

supplied CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instru-

ment. Backup files can also be transferred from the

instrument to the computer and back.

In order to transfer files between your computer and

the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft

Downloader application and the USB-MIDI Driver

included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your com-

puter. Refer to the Accessory CD-ROM Installation

Guide on page 89 for installation details.

With the Musicsoft Downloader You

Can.

 Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s

flash memory.

 refer to the procedure described on page 87.

The procedure for transferring songs included on

the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to

the instrument is given as an example.

 Backup files can be transferred from the instrument

to a computer and back.

 refer to the procedure described on page 88.

* Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet

Explorer 5.5 or higher.

InitSend

Data that can be transferred from a computer

to this instrument.

Data Capacity: 1.5MB

512 files total for the Song and Style

Data Format

Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1

Style: (.sty)

Backup File: 10PK6.BUP(NP-V80)

10PK5.BUP(NP-V60)

What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?

The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the

most common and widely compatible sequence for-

mats used for storing sequence data. There are two

variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number

of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0,

and most commercially available MIDI sequence

data is provided in SMF Format 0.

Connecting to a Computer

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Use Musicsoft Downloader To

Transfer Songs From the Accessory

CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash

memory

Install the Musicsoft Downloader and

USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then

connect the computer and the instru-

ment (page 84).

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader

shortcut icon that is created on the

desktop.

This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader appli-

cation and the main window will appear.

Click the “Add File” button and the Add

File window will appear.

Click the button to the right of “Look in”

and select the CD-ROM drive from the

drop-down menu that appears. Double-

click the “SampleData” Folder on the

window. Select the file from the “Song-

Data” Folder you want to transfer to the

instrument, and click “Open”.

At this point you can select a Style file on the

computer or CD-ROM and transfer it to the

instrument in the same way as a song file.

A copy of the selected MIDI song file

will appear in the “List of files stored

temporarily” at the top of the window.

The memory medium will also be displayed at the

bottom of the window to specify the destination

for the transfer. Click the “Electronic Musical

Instruments”, and then “Flash memory.”

After selecting the file in the “List of

files stored temporarily”, click the down-

ward [Move] button and a confirmation

message will appear. Click [OK] and the

song will be transferred from the “List

of files stored temporarily” to the instru-

ment’s memory.

Close the window to end the Musicsoft

Downloader.

• If a song or style is being played, stop playback before pro-

ceeding.

• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft

Downloader is running.

NOTE

w Double-click “SampleData”

Folder  “SongData” Folder,

and click a song file.

e Click

“Open”

q Click the CD-ROM drive

• End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file trans-

ferred from your computer.

q Click the “Electronic Musical Instru-

ments”, and then “Flash Memory”

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer

Owner’s Manual

Reference

To playback a song stored in flash

memory, press the [SONG] button.

Use the dial to select the song you want

to play, then press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback.

A style file stored in flash memory must first be

loaded into style number 166 on the NP-V80 or

style number 161 on the NP-V60 via the Load

Style File function before it can be played. Refer

to page 81 for NP-V80 details, or to page 67 for

NP-V60 details.

Transfer a backup file from the

instrument to a computer

You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer

“Backup Files” containing backup data (page 50),

including the five User Songs stored on the instru-

ment, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical

Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display,

and then “System Drive”, a file named

“10PK6.BUP(NP-V80), 10PK5.BUP(NP-V60)” will

appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft

Downloader display. This is the backup file. For

details about how to transmit backup file using the

Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online

help “Transferring Data Between the Computer and

Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application.

• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not

only will the data not be transferred and saved, but opera-

tion of the memory media may become unstable and its

contents may disappear completely when the power is

turned on or off.

• Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or

improper operation. For safety we recommend that you

keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer.

• We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than

batteries when transferring data. The data can be cor-

rupted if the batteries fail during the transfer.

To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...

When using songs (only SMF format 0) transferred

from a computer for lessons you can specify which

channels are to be played back as the right-hand and

left-hand parts.

1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song

(036–) residing in flash memory for which you

want to set the guide track.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

select the R-Part or L-Part item.

4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to

play back as the specified right- or left-hand

part.

The default settings are channel 1 for the right-hand

part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

NOTICE

• The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmit-

ted/received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will

be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this

in mind when transferring data.

• Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do

so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instru-

ment.

NOTICE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

• The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.

• Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to

upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement on

page 95 before installing the application.)

• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden

without the written consent of the manufacturer.

• Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and

cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.

• This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player,

etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.

• The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat dif-

ferent from the screens which appear on your computer.

• Software such as the USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Make sure to check

and download the latest version of the software from the following site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be

announced separately.

Important Notices about the CD-ROM

Data Types

This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 91 for software installation instructions.

Operating System (OS)

The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.

SPECIAL NOTICES

• Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on equipment other

than a computer. The result high-volume noise can poten-

tially cause hearing damage or damage your equipment.

CAUTION

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

Reference

CD-ROM Contents

When the included CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, the following start window will appear automat-

ically. (If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My computer” folder and double click

“Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive.)

In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.

Adobe Reader can be downloaded free at the Adobe website.

Folder Name Application / Data Name Contents

MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader

This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the

Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s mem-

ory.

Refer to page 93 for installation instructions.

USBdrv32_

USB-MIDI Driver

(for 32-bit version Windows

2000/XP/Vista/7)

This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your

computer via USB.

Refer to page 91 for installation instructions.

USBdrv64_

USB-MIDI Driver

(for 64-bit version Windows

XP/Vista/7)

SongBook Song Book

Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instru-

ment as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The

exceptions are songs 1–11 and 30. The scores for songs 9–11 are

provided in the separate Data List.

SampleData

SongData MIDI 70 songs

These songs, styles, or data can be transferred to the instrument

and played or used with the instrument’s functions.

StyleData 5 style files

MDB 5 Music Database data

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

Reference

System Requirements

Software Installation

If you have any problems with the installation, refer to

the troubleshooting section on page 93.

Installing / Updating the USB-MIDI

Driver

In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI

instruments connected to your computer, the appropri-

ate driver software must be properly installed on your

computer.

The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and

similar applications on your computer to transmit and

receive MIDI data to and from instruments via a USB

cable.

Follow the steps below to install (or update) the USB-

MIDI driver.

Disconnect all USB devices from the

computer except for the mouse and

computer keyboard.

Start the computer and use the “Admin-

istrator” account to log on to Windows.

Close all applications and windows that are open.

Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your

computer’s CD-ROM drive.

Turn off the power of the instrument.

Connect the USB connector of the com-

puter to the USB connector of the MIDI

instrument with a standard USB cable.

Turn on the power of the instrument(s).

When the “Found New Hardware Wiz-

ard” window appears, click [Cancel].

Data OS Computer Memory Hard Disk Display

Musicsoft

Downloader

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional/

Vista

* Only 32-bit is supported.

Windows 7

233 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium/Celeron Proces-

sor family

(500 MHz or higher is rec-

ommended)

64 MB or more

(256 MB or more is

recommended)

128 MB or more

(at least 512 MB

of free space is

recommended)

800 x 600

HighColor

(16-bit)

USB Driver for

Windows

Windows XP Professional

(SP2/SP3)/XP Home Edi-

tion (SP2/SP3)/2000 (SP4)

166 MHz or higher; Intel

Core/Pentium/Celeron

processor

32 MB or more

(64 MB or more is

recommended)

10 MB or more —

Windows XP Professional

x64 Edition (SP2)

Intel 64 compatible pro-

cessor

256 MB or more 10 MB or more —

Windows Vista (SP0/SP1/

SP2)

800 MHz or higher; Intel

Core/Pentium/Celeron

processor or Intel 64 com-

patible processor

512 MB or more 10 MB or more —

Windows 7

1.4 GHz or higher; Intel

Core/Pentium/Celeron

processor or Intel 64 com-

patible processor

1 GB or more (32-

bit)/2 GB or more

(64-bit)

10 MB or more —

• The example displays shown in this guide are in English.

NOTE

MIDI instrument

Computer

Sequence

software

Driver

USB Cable

• Do not use a USB hub for connecting multiple USB

devices.

• If you are using several MIDI instruments with USB con-

nection at the same time, connect all the instruments to

the computer and turn on the power for all of them, then

perform the following installation procedure.

• On some computers, it may take a few minutes before

this screen appears.

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Open the following folder from the CD-

ROM drive in your “My Computer”

folder, and double click “setup.exe.”

• For users of 32 bit version Windows 2000/XP/

Vista/7: “USBdrv32_”

• For users of 64 bit version Windows XP/Vista/7:

“USBdrv64_”

* Select [Start] menu  [Control Panel]  [System] to

check the system. (Windows XP: “x64 Edition”

appears on the 64 bit version, and does not appear on

the 32 bit version.)

When the “File Download” window

appears, click [Run] or [Open].

The “Preparing to install” window appears. The

next window will appear after finishing this prep-

aration.

When the “Welcome to the InstallShield

Wizard for Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver”

window appears, click [Next].

If the warning message below appears during the

installation, click [Yes], [Continue Anyway], or

[Install].

When a message appears indicating

that the driver has been successfully

installed, click [Finish].

When a window appears prompting you

to restart the computer, do so.

Restart the computer by following the on-screen

directions.

• This screen will not appear on Windows 7. When the

message “Device driver software was not successfully

installed.” appears, continue the installation procedure.

• This screen will not appear if you are updating the USB-

MIDI driver from the previous version. Continue the

installation procedure.

• The messages that appear in this window may differ

somewhat depending on your browser.

• (Windows XP) If the “Security Warning” window

appears, click [Run].

• (Windows Vista/7) If the “User Account Control” window

appears, click [Continue] or [Yes].

NOTE

Windows 2000

• On some computers, it may take a few minutes before

this screen appears.

• This display will not appear when using Windows XP

x64/Vista/7. No restart is necessary.

Checking the version of the driver

Open the “Control Panel” and double-click the

“Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” icon.

A window appears and the driver version is indicated

in the lower left of the window.

Windows XP

Windows Vista/7

NOTE

• When using Windows XP x64/Vista/7, double-click the

“Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver (WDM)” icon.

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Installing the Musicsoft Downloader

Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your

computer’s CD-ROM drive.

The start window will appear automatically

showing software applications.

Click [Musicsoft Downloader].

Click the [Install] button, and follow the

on-screen instructions to install the

software.

For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions

see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Down-

loader application and click “Help”.

* You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft

Downloader at the following web site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

Troubleshooting

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the

USB cable, then connect it again.

• Is the USB function enabled on your computer?

When you connect the instrument to the computer

for the first time, if the “Add (Found) New Hard-

ware Wizard” or the “Found New Hardware” win-

dow does not appear, the USB function on the

computer may be disabled. Perform the following

steps.

1 Select [Control Panel]*  [System]  [Hard-

ware]  [Device Manager] (for Windows

2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] 

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear

at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB

Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the

USB controller is disabled.

• Is any unknown device registered?

If driver installation fails, the instrument will be

marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not

be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown

device” by following the steps below.

1 Select [Control Panel]*  [System]  [Hard-

ware]  [Device Manager] (for Windows

2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] 

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View

devices by type”.

3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to

extend the tree to look for “Unknown

device”. If one appears, select it and click

the [Remove] button.

4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument,

and make the connection again.

5 Install the driver again. (pages 91–92)

• You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges

in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer

running Windows 2000, XP, Vista or 7.

• If the start window does not appear automatically, open

the “My Computer” folder and double click “Start.exe” in

the CD-ROM drive. Then, proceed to step 2 below.

• Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files

between this instrument and a computer. No other file

transfer application can be used.

IMPORTANT

NOTE

IMPORTANT

The driver cannot be installed.

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

Reference

• Did you install the driver? (page 91)

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

• Are the volume settings of the instrument, play-

back device, and application program set to the

appropriate levels?

• Have you selected an appropriate port in the

sequence software?

• Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver? The

latest driver can be downloaded from the follow-

ing web site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• Does your computer satisfy the system require-

ments?

• Is any other application or device driver run-

ning?

• Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI

application is running.

If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be

able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the

particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.).

Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the

USB cable will allow you to use the instrument

functions again.

[Windows 2000/XP]

1 Disconnect all USB devices from the com-

puter except for the mouse and keyboard.

2 Start the computer and log on to the

Administrator account.

Exit from any open applications and close all

open windows.

3 From the [Start] menu, select ([Settings] )

[Control Panel]  [Add or Remove Pro-

grams] to display the Add or Remove Pro-

grams panel.

4 Click “Change or Remove Programs”

located in the upper left, then select

“Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or “Yamaha

Musicsoft Downloader” from the list in the

right panel.

5 Click [Remove].

A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to

remove the software.

[Windows Vista/7]

1 Disconnect all USB devices from the com-

puter except for the mouse and keyboard.

2 Start the computer and log on to the

Administrator account.

Exit from any open applications and close all

open windows.

3 From the [Start] menu, select the [Control

Panel]  [Programs and Features] or [Unin-

stall a program] to display the “Uninstall or

change a program” window.

4 Select “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or

“Yamaha Musicsoft Downloader” from the

list.

5 Click [Uninstall].

If the “User Account Control” window appears,

click [Allow] or [Continue].

A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to

remove the software.

When controlling the instrument from your

computer via USB, the instrument does not

operate correctly or no sound is heard.

Playback response is delayed.

Cannot suspend or resume the computer cor-

rectly.

How can I remove the software?

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

Reference

ATT ENT IO N

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREE-

MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE

ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT

IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND

YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).

BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING

TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT

AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE

USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT

Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)

and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-

WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.

The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-

tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While

you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-

WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-

rights.

• You m a y use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.

• You m a y make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for

backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup

copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copy-

right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy

of the SOFTWARE.

• You m a y permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-

WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and

agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS

• You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or

otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method

whatsoever.

• You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-

WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.

• You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to

another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.

• You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-

lates public policy.

• You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without

permission by Yamaha Corporation.

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by

means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you

must observe.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-

mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-

ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public

without permission of the copyright owner.

• The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be

removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission

of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION

This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE

and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of

this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and

immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must

immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written doc-

uments and all copies thereof.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA

As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible

media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-

rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days

from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire

liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media

if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days

with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-

aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PER-

MITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTIC-

ULAR PURPOSE.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE

You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your

sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”

and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER

PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS

ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT

WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WAR-

RANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS,

THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTER-

RUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE

WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-

MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO

EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-

SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,

EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-

ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-

WARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall

Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action

(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-

WA RE.

7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE

Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be

attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data

accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide

by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is

responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.

• Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

• Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

• Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,

without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,

expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-

use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

8. GENERAL

This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese

law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or proce-

dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a

court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unen-

forceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and

effect.

9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with

respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and

supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written

or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revi-

sion of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully

authorized representative of Yamaha.

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical

power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce

interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further

away from the instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is played

or when a song or style is being played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the

rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound

is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 85.)

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard

does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 68), the keys in the right hand

area are used only for entering the chord root and type.

The volume is too soft.

The sound quality is poor.

The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.

The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-

rectly.

The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel

settings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely

new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.

The style or song does not play back when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer

to “External Clock” on page 85.

The style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 64) is set to an appropriate level.

Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing?

Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 65).

Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing

press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed after selecting the “Sere-

nade” style in the Waltz category and all styles in the

Pianist category.

This is not a malfunction. The “Serenade” style in the Waltz category and

all styles in the Pianist category styles have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm

will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual

voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the

same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the

accompaniment or song.

Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes

simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t

sound when playing arpeggios.

You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyph-

ony (the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of

the instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than

32 notes are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any auto-

matic playback functions.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch

cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the

sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch

plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the

power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple record-

ings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus,

the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn it off.

The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-

related function.

The USB device does not respond. Disconnect the device from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on

the power of the instrument.

The file name of a file transferred to the instrument’s

flash memory or a file on a USB flash memory con-

nected to the instrument is not displayed.

The number of file names that can be shown on the display is limited to

500 for song files and 100 for style files. Please limit the number of files

accordingly.

Appendix

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Specifications

Keyboards

• 76 box type keys (E0–G6), with Touch Response.

Display

• LCD display (backlit)

Setup

•STANDBY/ON

• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX

Realtime Control

• Pitch Bend Wheel

Voice

• (NP-V80) 127 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite

voices

• (NP-V60) 116 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite

voices

• Polyphony: 32

• DUAL

•SPLIT

Style

• NP-V80: 165 Preset style+External Files

NP-V60: 160 Preset style+External Files

• Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP,

SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/

ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL

• Fingering: Multi Finger

• Style Volume

Music Database

•305

Education Feature

• Dictionary

• Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn

Registration Memory

• 8 banks x 4 types

Function

• VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume

• OVERALL: Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sen-

sitivity, Pitch Bend Range

• MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Cho-

rus Level

• DUAL VOICE:

Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level

• SPLIT VOICE:

Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level

• EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ

Type

• HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume

• ARPEGGIO (NP-V80 only):

Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity, Arpeggio

Quantize, Arpeggio Pedal

• SFF Load (NP-V60):

Style File Load

• Performance assistant technology:

Performance assistant technology type

•PC: PC Mode

•MIDI:

Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,

Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out

• METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature

Denominator, Metronome Volume

• LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade

• DEMO: Demo Group, Demo Play, Demo Cancel

• POWER SAVE

•LANGUAGE

Effects

• Reverb: 9 types

• Chorus: 4 types

• Harmony: 26 types

• Arpeggio: 50 types

Song

• 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM

Songs (70)

• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Song Volume

• Song Control: REPEAT&LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE,

REW, FF, START/STOP

Performance assistant technology

• Chord, Chord/Free

Recording

•Song

User Song: 5 Songs

Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE

MIDI

• Local On/Off • Initial Send • External Clock

• Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN, USB, SUSTAIN, USB TO DE-

VICE

Amplifier

• 6W + 6W

Speakers

• NP-V80: (12cm x 6cm) x 2 + 5cm x 2

• NP-V60: (12cm x 6cm) x 2

Power Supply

• Adaptor: Users within U.S.: PA-150 or an equivalent

Others: PA-5D, PA-150 or an equivalent

• Batteries: Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• NP-V80: 1264 x 312 x 111mm (49-3/4" x 12-5/16" x 4-3/8")

• NP-V60: 1228 x 312 x 111mm (48-3/8" x 12-5/16" x 4-3/8")

Weight

• NP-V80: 7.1kg (15 lbs. 10 oz.)

• NP-V60: 6.3kg (13 lbs. 14 oz.)

* Not including batteries

Supplied Accessories

• AC Power Adaptor PA-150

* May not be included depending on your particular area. Please

check with your Yamaha dealer.

• Footswitch(NP-V80 only)

•Music Rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Owner’s Manual

• Data List

• My Yamaha Product User Registration

* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out

the User Registration form.

Optional Accessories

• AC Power Adaptor:

Users within U.S.: PA-150 or an equivalent

Others: PA-5D, PA-150 or an equivalent

• Footswitch: FC4/FC5

• Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L

• Headphones: HPE-150/30

• Footpedal: FC3

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for

information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change

or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice.

Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in

every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Index

A-B Repeat ..................................................................71

Accessories ...................................................................7

ACMP .......................................................................... 23

Arpeggio ......................................................................20

Arpeggio Pedal ...........................................................61

Arpeggio Quantize ..................................................... 60

Arpeggio Type ............................................................ 21

Arpeggio Velocity .......................................................60

Auto Accompaniment Range .................................... 23

Auto-Accompaniment ..........................................22, 62

Backup ...................................................................50, 88

Bank .............................................................................48

Channel .......................................................................88

Chord ...............................................................24–25, 68

Chord Dictionary ........................................................68

Chorus ......................................................................... 51

Chorus Level ...............................................................74

Computer .....................................................................84

Default Setting ............................................................73

Delete (SMF Song) ....................................................82

Delete (Songs transferred from a computer) ............ 50

Delete (User File) .......................................................82

Delete (User Song) .....................................................47

Demo ...........................................................................29

Demo Cancel ..............................................................75

Demo Group ...............................................................69

Demo Play Mode ........................................................69

Display ........................................................................ 15

Drum Kit .....................................................................16

Dual Voice ............................................................. 18, 57

Easy Song Arranger ...................................................41

Effect ...........................................................................51

Ending ......................................................................... 62

External Clock ............................................................85

Fast-Forward (FF) ...................................................... 29

File Control ................................................................. 76

Fill ............................................................................... 62

Flash Memory ....................................................... 26, 87

Footswitch ............................................................. 11, 61

Format (USB Flash Memory) ................................... 78

Function ................................................................ 73–75

Grade ........................................................................... 31

Harmony ..................................................................... 59

Harmony Volume ....................................................... 75

Headphones ................................................................ 11

Initial Send .................................................................. 86

Initialization ................................................................ 50

Intro ............................................................................. 62

Keyboard Out ............................................................. 85

Lesson ......................................................................... 30

Load (Style File) .................................................. 67, 81

Load (User File) ......................................................... 81

Local ............................................................................ 85

L-Part ........................................................................... 88

Main (Section) ............................................................ 62

Main Voice .................................................................. 16

Master EQ Type ......................................................... 55

Measure ....................................................................... 15

Melody Voice .............................................................. 72

Metronome ............................................................ 19, 53

MIDI ............................................................................ 84

Music Database .......................................................... 40

Music Rest .................................................................... 7

Mute ............................................................................ 71

Notation ...................................................................... 15

Index

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Octave ..........................................................................56

One Touch Setting ......................................................54

Pan ...............................................................................56

Part (Right, Left) ........................................................30

PC Mode ..................................................................... 85

Performance assistant technology .............................35

Pitch Bend ...................................................................54

Pitch Bend Range .......................................................74

Power Adaptor ............................................................ 10

Preset Song ..................................................................26

Recording .................................................................... 43

Registration Memory ................................................. 48

Repeat ....................................................................33, 71

Reverb ..........................................................................51

Reverb Level ...............................................................74

Rewind (REW) ...........................................................29

R-Part ...........................................................................88

Save (Backup File) ...............................................50, 88

Save (Panel Setting) ...................................................48

Save (SMF Song) ....................................................... 80

Save (User File) ..........................................................79

Section ......................................................................... 62

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ........................................86

Song .............................................................................26

Song Clear ................................................................... 47

Song Out .....................................................................85

Split Point .............................................................. 18, 65

Split Voice ............................................................. 18, 57

Style ....................................................................... 22, 62

Style File .....................................................................67

Style Out ..................................................................... 85

Style Tempo ................................................................ 64

Sustain (Footswitch) .............................................11, 61

Synchro Start ........................................................23, 62

Synchro Stop ...............................................................63

Tap Start ................................................................ 65, 72

Tempo (Metronome) .................................................. 19

Tempo (Song) ............................................................. 70

Tempo (Style) ............................................................. 64

Time Signature (Denominator) ................................. 53

Time Signature (Numerator) ..................................... 53

Touch Response .......................................................... 58

Touch Sensitivity ........................................................ 58

Track ............................................................................ 44

Track Clear ................................................................. 47

Transfer ................................................................. 86–88

Transpose .................................................................... 52

Troubleshooting (Installation) ................................... 93

Troubleshooting (Instrument) ................................... 96

Tuning ......................................................................... 53

USB ............................................................................. 84

USB-MIDI Driver ...................................................... 91

User Song .................................................................... 43

Vo i c e ...................................................................... 16, 56

Volume (Dual Voice) .................................................. 56

Vo l u m e ( M ai n Vo i ce ) ................................................. 56

Volume (master) ......................................................... 11

Volume (Song) ............................................................ 70

Volume (Split Voice) .................................................. 56

Volume (Style) ............................................................ 64

XGlite ............................................................................ 6

Owner’s Manual

100

LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON

PORTABLE KEYBOARDS

(NP, PSR-E, YPG AND YPT SERIES)

Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every

Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the

Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s

authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted

Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or

Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or

otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or

materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If

Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay

the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)

damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to

follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the

carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been

altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)

deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)

damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/

noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of

alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original

Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted

Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact

Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local

authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer

has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website

at www.Yamaha.com

. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of

the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase

document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found

ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon

receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE

APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER

EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.

YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT

YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to

state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to

assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by Yamaha.

Owner’s Manual

101

Owner’s Manual

102

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTO-

NIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Office

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii

Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia

Tel: 495 626 0660

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

EKB50

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WT59290 XXXPOXXX.X-XXB0

Printed in China

Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

Appendix Owner’s Manual EN Reference Quick Guide Setting Up SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 2 Owner’s Manual not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. * This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (2 wires) Serial No. (bottom) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : NP-V80/NP-V60 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en) Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, shortcircuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Battery • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 97) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Water warning • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. • Do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. • Keep batteries away from children. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. • The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. • It emits unusual smells or smoke. • Some object has been dropped into the instrument. • There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Connections • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Handling caution Location • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. (7)-1 4 Owner’s Manual • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. 1/2 Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ](Standby/On) switch is standby (the LCD backlight is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE To avoid the possibility of damage to the product, data or other property, follow the notices below.  Handling and Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  Saving data • Some data items (page 50) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device (NP-V80 only)/or other external device such as a computer (page 88). (NP-V80 only) To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices/or other external device such as a computer.  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (7)-1 2/2 Owner’s Manual 5 Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 6 Owner’s Manual About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of four main sections: “Setting Up,” “Quick Guide,” “Reference,” and “Appendix.” Also, a separate “Data List” is provided. Owner’s Manual (this book) Setting Up ••••••••• Please read this section first. Quick Guide ••••••••• This section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while playing the instrument. Reference ••••••••• This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s various functions. Appendix ••••••••• This section includes troubleshooting information and specifications. Data List Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. MIDI Reference The MIDI Reference section contains MIDI related information. The MIDI Reference is available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library at: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Included Accessories The package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • AC Power Adaptor * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • Owner’s Manual • Music rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Footswitch (NP-V80 only) • Data List • My Yamaha Product User Registration * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features Graded Soft Touch keyboard Just as on an actual piano, the lower keys are heavy in touch and the higher keys are light, with soft touch of digital keyboard for beginners. Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 16 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. Play Along with Styles Page 23 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. Using Songs Page 26 You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. Arpeggio Function (NP-V80 only) Page 20 Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be produced by changing your fingering or the arpeggio type. 8 Owner’s Manual EuTrance 042 Voice Settings 10 Power Requirements......................................................10 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) .....11 Connecting a Footswitch or a Foot Pedal (SUSTAIN Jack) .............................................................11 Turning the Power On ....................................................11 Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Basic Operation and Displays 14 16 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN.....................................16 Play the Grand Piano Voice ...........................................17 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL ......................18 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands —SPLIT..........................................................................18 Using the Metronome .....................................................19 Creating Arpeggios (NP-V80 only) 20 Use the Arpeggio Function.............................................20 Changing the Arpeggio type...........................................21 Playing Styles 22 Select a Style Rhythm ....................................................22 Play Along with a Style...................................................23 Playing Songs 26 Select and Listen to a Song ...........................................26 Select and Play Songs on a USB Flash Memory (NP-V80 only).................................................................28 Play Songs in Sequence ................................................29 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............29 Reference Select a Song For a Lesson 30 The Easy Way to Play Piano 34 Play Using the Music Database 40 Change a Song’s Style 41 Record Your Own Performance 43 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 48 Backup and Initialization 50 Backup ...........................................................................50 Initialization ....................................................................50 Handy Performance Features Arpeggio Settings (NP-V80 only) 60 Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics ...60 Synchronizing an arpeggio to a tempo of Style or Song ...60 Holding the arpeggio Playback ......................................61 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Quick Guide Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 56 Voice Editing ..................................................................56 Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................57 Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................57 Touch Response Sensitivity (NP-V80)...........................58 Touch Response Sensitivity (NP-V60)...........................58 Harmony ........................................................................59 51 Adding Reverb ...............................................................51 Adding Chorus ...............................................................51 Panel Sustain .................................................................52 Pitch Controls (Transpose).............................................52 Pitch Controls (Tuning) ..................................................53 Setting the Metronome Time Signature..........................53 62 Pattern Variation (Sections) ...........................................62 Changing the tempo of the Style....................................64 Adjusting the Style Volume ............................................64 Setting the Split Point.....................................................65 Tap Start ........................................................................65 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ..................................................66 Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard......................66 Loading Style Files (NP-V60).........................................67 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............68 Song Settings Quick Guide Setting Up 69 BGM Playback ...............................................................69 Random Song Playback ................................................69 Changing the tempo of the Song ...................................70 Song Volume .................................................................70 A-B Repeat ....................................................................71 Muting Independent Song Tracks ..................................71 Tap Start ........................................................................72 Change the Melody Voice ..............................................72 The Functions 73 Selecting and Setting Functions ....................................73 Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) 76 File Control Functions ....................................................76 Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal ..........................................................................77 Using USB Storage Devices ..........................................77 Connecting to a Computer Reference Setting Up Adjusting the Metronome Volume ..................................54 Pitch Bend......................................................................54 One Touch Setting .........................................................54 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound .......................55 Auto Power Off Setup ....................................................55 84 Connecting a Personal Computer ..................................84 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer ...85 Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument ...86 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 89 Important Notices about the CD-ROM ...........................89 CD-ROM Contents .........................................................90 System Requirements....................................................91 Software Installation.......................................................91 Appendix Troubleshooting 96 Specifications 97 Index 98 Owner’s Manual 9 Appendix About this Owner’s Manual and Data List ........................7 Included Accessories .......................................................7 Special Features ..............................................................8 Setting Up Contents Setting Up Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Setting Up Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. USB flash memory save, delete, and format operations can only be performed on the NP-V80 when the instrument is being powered from an AC adapter. These operations cannot be performed using battery power. Using an AC Power Adaptor WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 97). The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. 1 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack. 2 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. 1 AC power adaptor 2 AC outlet Using Batteries 1 Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. 2 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. 3 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see pages 50, 88). CAUTION • Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to prevent possible fluid leakage. NOTICE NOTE • Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are installed. • The use of alkaline batteries is recommended for this instrument. Other types of batteries may exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possibly resulting in a loss of flash memory data. • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. 10 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. footswitch FC4/FC5 to this jack and press the pedal to sustain the sound. An optional FC3 foot pedal can also be connected to this jack. If you connect an optional pedal of FC3, the half pedal function* can be used. Setting Up Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) * half pedal function While you playing the piano with SUSTAIN and if you need to delete the cloudy sound, release the foot from pedal to half position. NOTE Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4" stereo phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connecting a Footswitch or a Foot Pedal (SUSTAIN Jack) • The sustain function does not affect split voices. • Make sure that power is OFF when connecting or disconnecting the pedal. • Do not press the pedal while turning the power on. Otherwise, the switch or pedal type (on/off) will be reversed. Turning the Power On The [ ](Standby/On) switch turns the power to the instrument on or standby. Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [ ](Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. Press the [ ](Standby/On) switch again to turn the power standby. While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by using the [MASTER VOLUME] control. CAUTION • Even when the switch is standby, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/ or remove the batteries from the instrument. The SUSTAIN jack is for connecting the footswitch or foot pedal. The pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. Connect an included footswitch (NP-V80 only) or an optional Owner’s Manual 11 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel The panel illustrations shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the NP-V80. Setting Up Display (page 15) q w t r y Li !1 e ui o !0 !2 @6 Front Panel q w e r t y u i o !0 12 [ ](Standby/On) switch...................... page 11 [MASTER VOLUME] control ................ page 11 [DEMO/BGM] button ............................page 29 [REC] button .........................................page 43 [1]–[5], [A] buttons ...............................page 44 LESSON [RIGHT] button ..................................page 30 [LEFT] button ....................................page 30 LESSON START [WAITING] button..............................page 30 [YOUR TEMPO] button .....................page 32 [MINUS ONE] button.........................page 33 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .. pages 19, 53 [TEMPO/TAP] button.. pages 19, 64, 65, 70, 72 [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button ........................page 35 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button......page 41 Owner’s Manual !1 SONG [REPEAT&LEARN] button................ page 33 [A-B REPEAT] button ....................... page 71 [REW] button .................................... page 29 [FF] button ........................................ page 29 [PAUSE] button ................................. page 29 [START/STOP] button....................... page 27 !2 STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button.................... page 23 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button ............. page 63 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ................ page 63 [SYNC STOP] button ........................ page 63 [SYNC START] button....................... page 62 [START/STOP] button....................... page 22 !3 [SONG] button...................................... page 26 !4 [STYLE] button..................................... page 22 !5 [VOICE] button ..................................... page 16 !6 [MUSIC DATABASE] button................. page 40 Panel Controls and Terminals !6 !7 !3 !4 !5 @0 iveGPno Setting Up NP-V60 [TOUCH ON/OFF] button @1 @2 !8 !99 @3 @4 @5 @7 Rear Panel @8 @9 #0 #1 Rear Panel @8 @9 #0 #1 USB TO HOST terminal ....................... page 84 SUSTAIN jack ....................................... page 11 PHONES/OUTPUT jack........................ page 11 DC IN jack ............................................. page 10 r f !7 [FUNCTION] button ..............................page 73 !8 [GRAND PIANO] button ....................... page 17 !9 REGIST [MEMORY/BANK], [1]–[4] buttons ......................................page 48 @0 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons .......................................... pages 14, 73 @1 DATA ENTRY Dial, Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons ............................. page 14 @2 [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button (NP-V80 only) .......................................page 20 [TOUCH ON/OFF] button (NP-V60 only) .......................................page 58 @3 [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................ pages 18, 57 @4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button................ pages 18, 57 @5 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ...............page 59 @6 PITCH BEND wheel..............................page 54 @7 USB TO DEVICE terminal (NP-V80 only) ....................................... page 76 Owner’s Manual 13 Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation 3 2 Start a function or play the keyboard. 1 Select an item or value. Select a basic function. LiveGPno Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. f Example: Selecting Voice 003, Grand Piano. Press briefly Press briefly to decrease. to increase. Decrease CATEGORY [ ] and [ When selecting a song or style, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons can also be used to select function items sequentially after pressing the [FUNCTION] button. f [+], [-] buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Dial Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. Increase r Number buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a Song, Style or Voice number or parameter value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted. r Setting Up Press a button to select a basic function: Voice, Style or Song. To change the instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard, press the [VOICE] button. If you want to play along with auto accompaniment, press the [STYLE] button. If you want to listen to a song, press the [SONG] button. ] buttons Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function calls up. When SONG is selected via the basic function buttons 1 above, the SONG indicator will light. When STYLE is selected the STYLE indicator will light. The corresponding labels above (SONG) or below (STYLE) the buttons then apply. 14 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation and Displays Display Items Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a song when the Song Lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. TOUCH Indicates that Touch response is turned on. (page 58) HARMONY Indicates that Harmony is turned on. (page 59) Setting Up The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. BEAT number and MEASURE Indicates the beat number in a mea001 sure during the Metronome function. Indicates the current measure during playback of a song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for the song or style. (pages 19, 45) Chord Display Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. (page 23) Track Display Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (pages 29, 44, 71) LiveGPno 001 001 DUAL Indicates that the Dual voice is turned on. (page 18) SPLIT Indicates that the Split voice is turned on. (page 18) Beat Display Indicates the current style or song beat with flashing arrows. (page 27) ARPEGGIO (NP-V80 only) Indicates that the Arpeggio is turned on. (page 20) Performance assistant technology Indicates that performance assistant technology is turned on. (page 33) ACMP ON Indicates that Accompaniment is turned on. (page 23) SYNC STOP Indicates that SYNC STOP is turned on. (page 63) Owner’s Manual 15 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Quick Guide In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The voice number and name will be displayed. Voice name Quick Guide LiveGPno 001 Voice number Select the voice you want to play. NOTE • You can also select the voice using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons after pressing the [VOICE] button. (page 14) f While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “102 Flute” voice. r 2 Appears when the Voice mode is engaged. Flute 102 Select 102 Flute Preset Voice Types (NP-V80) 001–127 Instrument Voices 128–139 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, via which they can be played. Details on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the Drum Kit List of the separate Data List. Preset Voice Types (NP-V60) 16 001–116 Instrument Voices 117–128 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, via which they can be played. Details on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the Drum Kit List of the separate Data List. Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Play the keyboard. NOTE • Voice Settings (page 56) Quick Guide Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [GRAND PIANO] button. The Grand Piano voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [GRAND PIANO] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. Owner’s Manual 17 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL Once you press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the dual function on, a second voice will sound that will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. Two voices will sound at the same time. Flute Quick Guide 102 Appears when dual voice is on Press the button a second time to turn the dual voice function off. A suitable dual voice is automatically selected when you turn on this function, but you can easily select a different dual voice (page 57). Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT Once you press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the split function on, you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 65). Split point Split voice Main voice and dual voice Flute 102 Appears when split voice is on Press the button a second time to turn the split voice function off. A suitable split voice is automatically selected when you turn on this function, but you can easily select a different split voice (page 57). 18 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Using the Metronome The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is convenient for practicing. Press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button to start the metronome. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. LiveGPno 4 Indicates the beat number in a measure during the Metronome function. If you want to adjust the metronome tempo, press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display, then you can use the dial to set the tempo. You can also set the tempo using the number buttons on the front panel. NOTE • You can set the time signature (page 53). Quick Guide 001 Tempo 090 Current Tempo value You can set the time signature (page 53). Owner’s Manual 19 Creating Arpeggios (NP-V80 only) The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggio-type phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be used for music production as well as performance. Use the Arpeggio Function Quick Guide 1 Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function on. The button lights when the Arpeggio function is on. 2 Play a note or notes on the keyboard to trigger Arpeggio playback. The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the number of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. When the split function is on, the arpeggio applies to the split voice. The arpeggio applies to the main and dual voices when the split function is off. Arpeggios cannot be played using the split and main/dual voices simultaneously. 3 20 When you have finished playing with the arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn it off. Owner’s Manual NOTE • When an FC4 or FC5 footswitch is connected to the SUSTAIN jack is pressed, the Arpeggio will continue to play after the note is released (page 61). Creating Arpeggios (NP-V80 only) Changing the Arpeggio type The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type. 1 Press and hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “ARP Type” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display. PfArp2 Hold for longer than a second. 2 Quick Guide 02 The currently selected arpeggio type Rotate the dial to select the desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeggio types is provided in the Arpeggio List of the separate Data List. You can save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any time you want to repeat your performance (page 48). You can also record your performance (page 43). Please note that the arpeggio sound for the split voice cannot be recorded. NOTE • No arpeggio will sound if you turn the arpeggio function on while playing notes on the keyboard. Owner’s Manual 21 Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 165 different styles on the NP-V80, or 160 different styles on the NP-V60. In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. Quick Guide 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style number and name will appear in the display. Style Name Std 8Bt 001 Style Number 2 This icon appears when a style number and name is displayed. Select a style. Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided in the Style List of the separate Data List. PopBossa NOTE • You can also use the style files provided on the supplied CD-ROM. Refer to page 81 for NP-V80 instructions, or page 67 for NP-V60 instructions. 102 3 22 Press the [START/STOP] button. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. Owner’s Manual NOTE • The “Serenade” style in the Waltz category and all styles in the Pianist category styles have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 23, press the [START/ STOP] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. For this example select the “153 PnoBoogi” style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. Quick Guide 2 PnoBoogi 153 This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. Split point (page 65) Auto accompaniment range 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. PnoBoogi 153 Flashes when sync start is on. When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. Owner’s Manual 23 Playing Styles 4 Start playing. Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Try playing the chord progression shown below. Split point Auto accompaniment range Quick Guide C F C G F C This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. PnoBoogi 153 001 Indicates the chord currently being played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. 5 Stop playing. Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. You can also stop playing by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button so that an appropriate ending pattern will play and then style playback will stop. You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 62. 24 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Chords (page 25) • Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary (page 68) Playing Styles Chords For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  indicates the root note. Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 Quick Guide Major • Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. • sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30 songs provided. Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. The song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to select a different song. Quick Guide Nocturne 011 The currently selected song and number are displayed 2 Select a song. Select a song after referring to the Song List in the separate Data List. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. ForElise 012 NOTE • You can also play songs you have recorded yourself (User Songs) or songs that have been transferred to the instrument from a computer in the same way that you play the internal songs. The song displayed here can be played The songs are organized by category. Song No. 26 Category Description 001–003 Main Demo The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. 004–008 Voice Demo These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. 009–011 Function Demo Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. 012–015 Piano Solo These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. 016–020 Piano Ensemble A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. 021–030 Piano Accompaniment When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. 031–035 User Song Songs you record yourself. 036– Flash Memory Songs stored on a USB flash memory plugged into the NP-V80, or songs transferred from a computer (pages 28, 87). Owner’s Manual Playing Songs Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button again. NOTE • Score data for the 30 internal songs are provided in the Songbook on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11 and 30. The scores for songs 9 to 11 are provided in the separate Data List. ForElise Quick Guide 3 012 The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style. Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Songs Select and Play Songs on a USB Flash Memory (NP-V80 only) MIDI songs stored on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument can be directly selected and played. Quick Guide The procedure is exactly the same as that for selecting internal songs (page 26). Songs on a USB flash memory are numbered from 36 upward, so all you need to do is select song number 36 or higher. Song File Can be selected/played. Song File Song File Cannot be selected/played. Song Title Display Language File names containing Japanese katakana characters will be properly displayed if the instrument’s display language is set to “Japanese”. All display information other than file names will be displayed in English even if “Japanese” is selected. Kanji characters cannot be displayed. The display language can be set via the “Language” function (page 75). 28 Owner’s Manual • Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal (page 77) IMPORTANT USB flash memory (Root) Song File NOTE • In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a computer or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB flash memory’s root directory or a firstlevel/second-level folder in the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a secondlevel folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. Playing Songs Play Songs in Sequence Press the [DEMO/BGM] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback will repeat continuously, starting again from the first Song (001). You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO/BGM] button. NOTE • You can select a song by using the [+] button after pressing the [DEMO/BGM] button. The [-] button can be used to go back to the beginning of the selected song. Quick Guide It is also possible to specify continuous playback of all internal songs, all songs transferred from a computer, or all MIDI songs on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument (page 69). This capability can be combined with the random playback function (page 69) for BGM type playback of any songs you like using the instrument’s internal tone generator. Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song. NOTE When lit the functions indicated by the labels above the buttons can be used. REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. • When an A-B repeat range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. Owner’s Manual 29 Select a Song For a Lesson Reference Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! The practice methods: Lesson 1—Waiting  Learn to play the correct notes. Lesson 2—Your Tempo  Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Lesson 3—Minus One  Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 2 Select a song for your lesson. Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”. Reference Turn off playback of the part you wish to practice. The preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts. The right-hand part is selected by the [RIGHT](1) button and the left-hand part is selected by the [LEFT](2) button. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required in order to practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. You can practice both parts when both the left- and right-parts are turned off. NOTE • Song numbers 10 and 11 are function demos for performance assistant. The lesson function cannot be used with them. • You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from the computer and saved to flash memory. (pages 86–88) • (NP-V80 only) You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) on a USB flash memory. (page 28) NOTE • You can turn parts on or off, even during playback. Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off. Turn off playback of the part you wish to practice. When you press one of the buttons to turn playback off, the corresponding part indicator in the display turns off and playback of that part is muted. (When you first select a song, both the “1” and “2” parts indicators will light, indicating that both parts are on.) ForElise 012 30 Owner’s Manual Right-hand lesson Track 1 is unlit Left-hand lesson Track 2 is unlit Both-hands lesson Track 1 and 2 are unlit Select a Song For a Lesson 3 Start Lesson 1. Press the [Waiting] button to start Lesson 1. Notation Waiting r1 007 In this case “r1” indicate that right-hand lesson 1 has been selected. Keyboard Display Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the correct note. Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. You can also stop the Lesson mode by pressing the [WAITING] button. NOTE See How You’ve Done Excellent Very Good Good OK ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~~~ ~~ When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 75). Reference 4 After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. Owner’s Manual 31 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on page 30). 2 Start Lesson 2. Press the [Your Tempo] button to start Lesson 2. Notation YourTemp r2 007 In this case “r2” indicate that right-hand lesson 2 has been selected. Keyboard Display Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. 3 Reference Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. You can also stop the Lesson mode by pressing the [YOUR TEMPO] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 32 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on page 30). 2 Start Lesson 3. Press the [Minus One] button to start Lesson 3. Notation MinusOne r3 007 In this case “r3” indicate that right-hand lesson 3 has been selected. Keyboard Display Play the note shown in the display. Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. You can also stop the Lesson mode by pressing the [MINUS ONE] button. Reference 3 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [REPEAT&LEARN] button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [REPEAT&LEARN] button, and then jump back four measures and repeat again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [REPEAT&LEARN] button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right. Press the button again to return to the normal lesson mode. NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. Owner’s Manual 33 The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning! Performance assistant technology offers two selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results for you.  Chord........................ No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-balanced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play anything with both your left and right hands.  Chord/Free ............... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with left-hand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to support the melody you are playing with your right hand. Reference Split Point Play your own melody with the right hand. 34 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano Using the Performance Assistant technology CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands Try out the performance assistant technology using the preset song “Ave Maria.” 1 2 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a different song. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave Maria”. NOTE • Select and Listen to a Song (page 26) Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the function on or off. Select the CHORD type. Reference PAT Type CHORD 1 r Select CHORD f 3 Press the [FUNCTION] button, then press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the performance assistant technology item “PAT Type”. “PAT Type” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected performance assistant technology type will be displayed. Select the Chord type by using the dial. Owner’s Manual 35 The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the fifth measure. 5 Play on the keyboard. Before After Reference Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 36 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. Owner’s Manual NOTE • The score for Ave Maria is provided in the separate Data List. The Easy Way to Play Piano CHD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne. 1 2 Select the song “011 Nocturne”. NOTE Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature on. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. • Select and Listen to a Song (page 26) Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the function on or off. Select the CHD/FREE type. PAT Type Reference CHD/FREE CHORD 2 1 r Select CHD/FREE f 3 Press the [FUNCTION] button, then press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the performance assistant technology item “PAT Type”. “PAT Type” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected performance assistant technology type will be displayed. Select the CHD/FREE type by using the dial. Owner’s Manual 37 The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the ninth measure. 5 Play on the keyboard. Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds. When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to step 2 on the next page and try adding the right-hand part. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. Reference 38 Owner’s Manual NOTE • The score for Nocturne is provided in the separate Data List. The Easy Way to Play Piano Next try playing a different preset song. 1 The procedure is the same as steps 1–3 for playing Ave Maria (page 35). Select any song. To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data. Select a song that includes chord data, referring to the Song List in the separate Data List. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to start song playback, then play freely referring to the description below. NOTE • Songs transferred to the instrument from a computer can also be used with the performance assistant technology as long as they include the required chord data. If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to the rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Play alternately with the left and right hands. How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to performance assistant technology! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger  middle finger  ring finger). Reference Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. 3 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. Owner’s Manual 39 Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Jude Hey 001 A Music Database name will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. Referring to the Music Database List in the separate Data List, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “162 Patrol”. Patrol 162 Reference 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point. Refer to page 25 for information about playing chords. Split Point Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. 40 Owner’s Manual Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it. Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [START/STOP] button to play it. Halleluj 009 As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the song remains the same. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. NOTE • The score for “Hallelujah Chorus” is provided in the separate Data List. Reference Using the Easy Song Arranger Try switching styles while the song plays back. 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The indicator lights when the Easy Song Arranger function is on. 2 Select a Song. Press the [SONG] button, then select the song you want to arrange. Select the songs that include the required chord data referring to the Song List in the separate Data List. Owner’s Manual 41 Change a Song’s Style 3 4 Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. Select a style. Press the [STYLE] button and then rotate the dial to hear how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. You can also press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to change the style’s main section. Changing the Melody Voice You can change the song’s melody voice while the Easy Song Arranger is on. Press the [VOICE] button once to display the name of the current melody voice. Use the dial to select a different voice, then press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” will appear in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the newly selected voice has replaced the song’s original melody voice. Reference 5 42 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button to turn the function off. If the song or style is being played back, first stop the playback, then turn the Easy Song Arranger function off. The indicator will go out. Owner’s Manual NOTE • When playing song numbers 010 and 021 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the track buttons [3] to [5]. NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on the instrument. Recording Press the [REC] button. NOTICE Track 1 is automatically selected User 1 031 Flashes 001 Flashes The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (Song numbers 031–035) available for recording is displayed. If you want to select the Song you will be recording, select the desired Song number by using the dial. You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again (Track 1 stop flashing). 2 Start recording. When you play the keyboard, recording will begin. 3 Stop recording. Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes the data to the User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.) To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button. • If all User Songs (Song numbers 031–035) contain recorded data, Song 031 will automatically be selected. In this case, you will record over and erase any previous data in Song 031, so be careful that you won’t be erasing any material you want to keep! NOTE • Accompaniment cannot be turned on or off once the [REC] button is pressed. NOTE • After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the [STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP indication is on. Reference 1 NOTICE • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. Owner’s Manual 43 Record Your Own Performance Recording to a specified track Recordable Data You can record up to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track. Each track can be recorded individually.  Melody Track [1]–[5]............... Record the melody parts.  Style Track [A]......................... Records the chord part. Melody Chords NOTE • Up to approximately 10,000 notes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the melody tracks. Up to approximately 5,500 chord changes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the style track. Specify track(s) and record Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Style Track Track Mute This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 71). 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. User 1 Reference 031 Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. NOTICE  Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together • If you record to a track that Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the contains previously[REC] button. recorded data the previous data will be overwritten Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. and lost. The selected tracks will flash in the display. NOTE User 1 rEC Press and hold 44 Owner’s Manual 001 Track 1 and Style Track will flash • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. Record Your Own Performance  Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. The selected track will flash in the display. User 1 rEC 001 NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. Track 1 will flash To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. NOTE User 1 Recording starts rEC 003 Current measure • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 47) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. NOTE or • If you want to record only the rhythm (percussion) part, press the [START/STOP] button to play just the rhythm, then add the section change by pressing the [INTO/ENDING/rit.] button or [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. Reference 4 Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light. Owner’s Manual 45 Record Your Own Performance To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—track buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while recording new tracks. To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 5 When the recording is done ... To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button.  To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 26). 1 Press the [SONG] button. 2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. Reference Data Recording Limitations • The split voice cannot be recorded. • The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume, tempo 46 Owner’s Manual Record Your Own Performance Song Clear—Deleting User Songs NOTE This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. 2 Press and hold the track [1] button for longer than a second while holding the track [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. Press and hold YES 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the song. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song 1 Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. 2 Press and hold the track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. Reference This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. ClrTr1 Hold for longer than a second. YES 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the track. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. Owner’s Manual 47 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 32 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of four setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Up to 32 presets (eight banks of four each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required—select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Bank 1 Bank number Reference 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. 4 Press one of the REGIST MEMORY buttons [1] to [4] while holding the [MEMORY/BANK] button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. Writing! NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. NOTICE • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. 48 Owner’s Manual Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Bank 1 Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. 3 Press one of the REGIST MEMORY buttons [1] to [4] containing the settings you want to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display for a few seconds. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. Reference REGIST 1 1 Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level, Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level) Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain Arpeggio settings (NP-V80 only) Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF, Arpeggio Quantize, Arpeggio Volume, Arpeggio Pedal Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. Owner’s Manual 49 Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation “Backup Clear” as explained below. The Backup Parameters • User Songs • Style Number 166(NP-V80), Style Number 161(NP-V60) • Touch Response on/off • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Group, Demo Play, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type NOTE • You can save the settings as backup data to your computer, by using the Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. Refer to the section “Transfer a backup file from the instrument to a computer” on page 88. Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. Backup Clear To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory turn the power on by pressing the [ ](Standby/On) switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. Reference “Backup Clear” does not delete the files transferred from the computer. If you want to delete the files, see “Deleting Files” below. Deleting Files To clear song and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [ ](Standby/On) switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. 50 Owner’s Manual NOTICE • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. Handy Performance Features Adding Reverb Adding Chorus Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select “Reverb”. “Reverb” will appear in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected reverb type will be displayed. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select “Chorus”. “Chorus” will appear in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected chorus type will be displayed. Reverb Reference Chorus1 02 1 The currently selected reverb type Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available reverb types. r Chorus Hall2 3 f r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 The currently selected chorus type 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available chorus types. Adjusting the Reverb Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 74). Adjusting the Chorus Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 74). Owner’s Manual 51 Handy Performance Features Panel Sustain Pitch Controls (Transpose) This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice. The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. r ] but- Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Transpos 00 Sustain oFF 3 Reference Use the dial to turn panel sustain on or off. Panel Sustain will be added to the notes you play on the keyboard when the Panel Sustain is on. To turn it off, select “oFF”. NOTE • The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the panel sustain function is turned on. 52 Owner’s Manual r 1 f 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ tons to select “Sustain”. The current setting is displayed. f 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. Handy Performance Features 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/ OFF] button for longer than a second to select the number of beats per measure function “TimesigN”. Hold for longer than a second. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. TimesigN 04 Tuning Number of beats per measure. 000 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. 3 f 3 2 Reference The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). Setting the Metronome Time Signature r Pitch Controls (Tuning) Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “TimesigD”. The currently selected beat length will be displayed. TimesigD 04 The length of one beat. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. Owner’s Manual 53 Handy Performance Features 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 74. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. r Pitch Bend f Adjusting the Metronome Volume MtrVol 100 Metronome volume 3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. One Touch Setting Reference Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 54 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the master EQ type function “MasterEQ”. “MasterEQ” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected EQ type will be displayed. The Auto Power Off function automatically turns the instrument’s power off if it is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that will elapse before the power is automatically turned off can be set from 5 to 30 minutes, in 5-minute increments. 1 Turn the power off, then press and hold the [ ](Standby/On) switch until “AutoOff” appears on the display. AutoOff r Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. f 1 Auto Power Off Setup oFF 2 Use the dial to select the desired Auto Power Off interval (05–30). Select “Off” if you want to disable the Auto Power Off function. Reference Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound MasterEQ Speakerl 1 The currently selected master EQ type. 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ setting. Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. Owner’s Manual 55 Voice Settings Voice Editing Category Create original voices by editing the many available voice parameters. By editing the various parameters available you can create new voices that best suit your musical needs. 1 Main Voice Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. r 2 f Dual Voice Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the item you want to edit. You can individually adjust the voice setting (Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level) that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. Refer to the Functions on page 74 for details. M.Volume 064 Reference 3 56 Use the dial to set the value. Edited parameters can be saved to registration memory (page 48). If you select a different keyboard voice the parameters will be reset and the ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. Owner’s Manual Split Voice Setting Display Range/ Settings Volume M.Volume 000–127 Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Pan M.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127 Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127 Voice D.Voice 000–500 (NP-V80) 000–489 (NP-V60) Volume D.Volume 000–127 Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Pan D.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127 Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127 Voice S.Voice 000–500 (NP-V80) 000–489 (NP-V60) Volume S.Volume 000–127 Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Pan S.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127 Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127 Voice Settings Selecting a Dual Voice Selecting a Split Voice 1 1 Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “D.VOICE” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected dual voice will be displayed. D.Voice S.Voice Marimba FngrBass 121 047 The currently selected split voice Select the desired Dual Voice by using the dial. 2 Select the desired Split Voice by using the dial. Reference The currently selected dual voice 2 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “S.Voice” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected split voice will be displayed. Owner’s Manual 57 Voice Settings Touch Response Sensitivity (NP-V80) Touch Response Sensitivity (NP-V60) You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in four steps. When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn touch response on. The [TOUCH ON/OFF] button alternately turns touch response on and off. The touch response icon will appear in the display when touch response is on. r 2 f Touch response icon Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the Touch Sensitivity item “TouchSns”. “TouchSns” will appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. When touch response is set to off, all notes will be played at the same volume no matter how hard or softly you play the keys. 2 Reference TouchSns Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the Touch Sensitivity item appears. “TouchSns” will appear in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. TouchSns Medium Hold for longer than a second. 2 Touch Sensitivity 3 Use the dial in response to keyboard dynamics to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 4. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics— i.e. greater sensitivity. When touch sensitivity is set to 4 (Off), all notes will be played at the same volume no matter how hard or softly you play the keys. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. 58 Owner’s Manual Medium 2 Touch Sensitivity 3 Use the dial in response to keyboard dynamics to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—i.e. greater sensitivity. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. Voice Settings Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again. When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the Harmony Type item appears. “HarmType” will appear in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected harmony type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different harmony type. HarmType 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 01 to 05 Reference 1 Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 23). • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Hold for longer than a second. Trio 02 Hold down two keys. • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) The currently selected harmony type Keep holding down the keys. • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) Keep holding down the keys. You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 75). Owner’s Manual 59 Arpeggio Settings (NP-V80 only) Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics Synchronizing an arpeggio to a tempo of Style or Song 1 Adjust the arpeggio quantization to synchronize the arpeggio to a Style or Song. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the “Quantize”. “Quantize” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected Quantize value will be displayed. r Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the arpeggio velocity function “ARP Velo”. “ARP Velo” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected arpeggio velocity setting will be displayed. f r f 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. ARP Velo Quantize Reference Original 1 1/8 The currently selected arpeggio velocity. The currently selected arpeggio quantization. 3 Use the dial to select “2 Thru”. When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio volume is the same regardless of changes in keyboard velocity. Thru 2 60 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the dial to select the appropriate quantize value (1/8, 1/16 or OFF) as required. A setting of “1/8” will align off-beat notes to the nearest 4th note, a setting of “1/16” will align offbeat notes to the nearest 8th note, and a setting of “OFF” will result in no quantization. The default arpeggio quantize setting depends on the arpeggio type. Arpeggio Settings (NP-V80 only) Holding the arpeggio Playback Arpeggio playback can be made to continue after the note has been released by pressing a footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack. Arpeggio playback will stop when the footswitch is released. Connect a footswitch (page 11), then assign the function to the footswitch as per the instructions below. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select “Pdl Func”. “Pdl Func” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected function assigned to the footswitch will be displayed. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 Reference Pdl Func Sustain 1 The function currently assigned to the footswitch. 3 Use the dial to select “Arp Hold”. Arp Hold 2 If you want to restore the footswitch function to sustain, select “Sustain”. If you want to use both hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus”. The sustain function affects the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Owner’s Manual 61 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 22 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) The instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. Reference ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. Beat arrows will flash when the synchro start standby mode is engaged Appears when Auto Accompaniment is on. Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. 62 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. ENDING MAIN A The name of the selected section— MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Chords” on page 25. This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. Reference 4 Split point Accompaniment range 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. The style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys FILL A≥B When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. Owner’s Manual 63 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display after selecting a Style. Tempo r Adjusting the Style Volume f Changing the tempo of the Style 090 Current Tempo value 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 011 to 280 quarter-note beats per minute. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a Style. You can change the tempo during style playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice. Reference 64 Owner’s Manual StyleVol 100 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Setting the Split Point Tap Start The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. You can start the style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during style playback by pressing the button just twice. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button. Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for longer than a second so that the Split point item appears. Hold for longer than a second. SplitPnt 054 Split point Reference Use the dial to set the split point to any key from E0(028) through G6(103). Split point (54 : F#2) Split voice Main voice NOTE • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. NOTE f • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 74). r 3 Owner’s Manual 65 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 25). In “Play Along with a Style” on page 23 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however, chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 25) can be detected. Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function, then press the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button to turn the auto accompaniment on. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the function “Chord Fingering”. “ChdFing” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected Chord Fingering type will be displayed. PnoBoogi Appears when auto accompaniment is on r f 153 Accompaniment range Reference ChdFing 3 Use the dial to select 2 “FullKbd”. FullKbd 2 66 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Loading Style Files (NP-V60) This instrument features 160 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style number 161 and used in the same way as the internal styles. In order to use the style file load function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 86 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”). The procedure described below loads a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 161. Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the style file load function “Sff Load”. 3 Execute the load operation. With the name of the style file you want to load shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 4 A confirmation message for the load operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually load the file. Reference 2 r Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display f 1 Sff Load After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence (100 files max.). Owner’s Manual 67 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. Highest key 1 Press and hold the [MINUS ONE] button for longer than a second. 3 Hold for longer than a second. Referring to the illustration, press the M7 (major seventh) key in the CHORD TYPE area (no sound will be produced). The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Dict. Reference Notation of chord 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Referring to the illustration, press the G key in the CHORD ROOT area (no sound will be produced). The root note you set is shown in the display. Chord name (root and type) Dict. 001 Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. Dict. 001 4 68 Owner’s Manual Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. Song Settings BGM Playback Random Song Playback With the default setting only a few of the internal songs are played back and repeated when the [DEMO/ BGM] button is pressed. This setting can be changed so that all internal songs are played, or all songs transferred to the instrument from a computer are played. Five playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs. The random play mode causes the songs in the group selected for BGM playback to be played back in random order. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select “PlayMode”. “PlayMode” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected repeat playback mode will be displayed. r Press and hold the [DEMO/BGM] button for longer than a second. “DemoGrp” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected repeat playback target will be displayed. Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 1 Hold for longer than a second. DemoGrp PlayMode Use the dial to select a repeat playback group from the table below. Demo Preset songs 001–008 Preset All preset songs User All User songs Download All songs transferred from a computer Reference 2 You cannot select the repeat playback mode when “Demo” is selected as the repeat playback group. 3 Use the dial to select “Random”. If you want to restore the normal playback mode, select “Normal”. All songs stored on a USB USB flash memory connected to the (NP-V80 only) instrument. Owner’s Manual 69 Song Settings Changing the tempo of the Song Song Volume Songs can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. r Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display after selecting a Song. f 1 Tempo 090 SongVol Current Tempo value 100 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 011 to 280 quarter-note beats per minute. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a Song. Song volume 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE You can change the tempo during song playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice. Reference 70 Owner’s Manual • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. Song Settings A-B Repeat Muting Independent Song Tracks You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. To mute a track, press the appropriate track button (TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same button a second time to disengage track muting. A 1 B Play the song (page 26) and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). Track number on—Track will playback Track number off—Track is muted or contains no data Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. Reference 2 NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in onemeasure increments. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song. Owner’s Manual 71 Song Settings Tap Start Change the Melody Voice You can start the song by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song playback by pressing the button just twice. You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody voice of a user song. 1 2 Select the song and play it. Rotate the dial to select the voice you want to listen to after pressing the [VOICE] button. Strings 050 3 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the voice selected in step #2 has replaced the song’s original melody voice. Reference Hold for longer than a second. SONG MEL 72 Owner’s Manual The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on pages 74, 75. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. StyleVol 100 r Select a function. Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Direct numeric entry. • Decrement value by 1. • NO Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. Reference f 3 • Increment value by 1. • YES The selected function. Transpos 00 Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 50 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 50. Owner’s Manual 73 The Functions Function Setting List Category Volume Settings Display Range/Settings StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Pitch Bend Range PBRange Split Point SplitPnt 028–103 (E0–G6) Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1(Soft), 2(Medium), When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of 3(Hard), the feature. 4(Off)(NP-V80 only) Fingering Chord ChdFing 1(Multi), 2(FullKbd) Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both standard chords and easy chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode standard chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well. Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Pan M.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Voice D.Voice 000–500(NP-V80) 000–489(NP-V60) Selects the Dual voice. Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Pan D.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Voice S.Voice 000–500(NP-V80) 000–489(NP-V60) Selects the Split voice. Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Pan S.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF Determines whether or not panel sustain is always applied to the MAIN/DUAL voices. Panel sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. MasterEQ Speaker1, Speaker2, Headphone, Line Out1, Line Out2 Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. Overall Main Voice Reference Dual Voice Split Voice Effect Master EQ Type 74 Description Style Volume Owner’s Manual The Functions Settings Display Range/Settings Description Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–50 Determines the Arpeggio type. Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru) Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback. Arpeggio Quantize Quantize OFF, 1/8, 1/16 Synchronizes arpeggio playback to a Style or Song. Arpeggio Pedal Pdl Func 1(Sustain)/ 2(Arp Hold)/ 3(Hold+Sus) Determines the pedal function in the arpeggio mode. PAT Performance assistant technology Type PAT Type CHORD(1), CHD/FREE(2) Determines the performance assistant technology type. Style File Load (NP-V60) Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style file. PC PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer. Local On/Off Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB TO HOST or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out SongOut ON/OFF Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB TO HOST or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Send InitSend YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator TimesigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack 1–16, OFF Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer, or songs stored on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument. Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack 1–16, OFF Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer, or songs stored on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument. Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Group DemoGrp 1(Demo)/ 2(Preset)/ 3(User)/ 4(Download) Determines the repeat playback group. Demo Playmode PlayMode 1(Normal)/2(Random) Determines the repeat playback mode. Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/ BGM] button is pressed. Power Save Auto Power Off AutoOff OFF, 5–30 Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. Language (NP-V80 only) Language Language Japanese/English Sets the file name display language. Harmony Arpeggio (NP-V80 only) MIDI Metronome Lesson Demo Owner’s Manual Reference Category 75 Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, registered settings can be saved from or loaded into the instrument. In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them. Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 77. File Control Functions 1 Connect a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to insert it with the proper orientation. 3 The file control function mode. Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button until the display changes. When the display changes you will be able to access the file control functions. Hold for more than 3 seconds Load STY Reference LiveGPno 001 Mounting Mounted Normal display Usb Usb 001 r Wait for confirmation that the USB flash memory has been properly mounted. f 2 If the file control functions are accessed while an unformatted USB flash memory is connected to the instrument, the “Format” function will automatically be selected. Use the category [ ] and [ ] buttons to select one of the file control functions listed below. Usb (Flashing) (Displayed for 2 seconds) File control function Reference page Format 78 Saving User Files 79 Saving User Songs as SMF Files 80 Loading User Files 81 Loading Style Files 81 Deleting User Files 82 Deleting SMF Song Files 82 Exit 83 (Measure number, etc.) To exit from the file control function mode press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. You can also exit from the file control function mode by selecting “EXIT” from the menu and pressing the [0] button (page 83). 76 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. • For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. Compatible USB devices • USB storage devices (flash memory and floppy disk drive) The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ The number of USB storage device to be used Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 78). NOTE Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. NOTICE • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. Reference • Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save and Delete operations). NOTICE • Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Owner’s Manual 77 Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) This section describes operation of the file control functions after you have engaged the file control function mode. Messages may appear on the display during file control procedures to aid in smooth operation. Refer to the Message List on page 83 for details. Format a USB Flash Memory USB flash memory devices must be properly formatted before they can be used with this instrument. NOTICE • If a USB flash memory that contains data is formatted as described below, the data will be erased. Make sure that a USB flash memory to be formatted contains no important data before carrying out the formatting procedure. NOTE • No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played while the file control display is showing, and only buttons related to file control operations will be active. NOTE • The file control display will not appear during: USB flash memory save, delete, and format operations can only be performed when the instrument is being powered from an AC adapter. These operations cannot be performed using battery power. • Style or song playback. 1 Basic File Operation Select the Format function. Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many times as necessary until the “Format?” function appears. r • USB flash memory read operations. f • Lessons. If multiple files are available for selection, use the dial to select the desired file. Press the [0] button to confirm the selection. The [0] button also executes the selected function. The [-] button cancels the selected function. Format? • Cancel Reference • Confirm file selection • Execute 2 Execute the Format function. Press the [0] button. A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0] button a second time to execute the Format operation, or press the [-] button to cancel the operation. NOTICE • The Format operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during formatting. Wait until a message indicating completion of the formatting operation appears. 3 78 Owner’s Manual Exit from the file control function mode. Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) Saving User Files “User files” containing 5 user songs, style 166, and the registration memory can be saved to USB flash memory. User files have a “.usr” file extension (the extension does not appear on the instrument’s display). 3 USB flash memory save, delete, and format operations can only be performed when the instrument is being powered from an AC adapter. These operations cannot be performed using battery power. r Select the Save User File function. Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many times as necessary until the “Save USR” function appears. f 1 Save the user file. A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0] button to execute the save operation, or press the [-] button to cancel the operation. User files will be saved in a folder labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically be created on the USB flash memory. NOTICE • The save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during a save operation. Wait until a message indicating completion of the save operation appears. 4 Exit from the file control function mode. Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. NOTE • The amount of time required to save the file may vary depending on the condition of the USB flash memory used. Save USR Specify the target user file. When the [0] button is pressed “USERxxx” will automatically be specified as the target user file (“xxx” will be a number). If the automatically specified file is satisfactory, press the [0] button. The dial can be used to select a different target file (USER001–USER100) if desired before pressing the [0] button. Reference 2 USER001 Overwriting Existing Files If a file that already contains data is selected as the target user file, an overwrite confirmation message will appear. Owner’s Manual 79 Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) Saving User Songs as SMF Files User songs can be converted to SMF (Standard MIDI File) format and saved to a USB flash memory. 3 NOTE • See page 86 for information on SMF (Standard MIDI File) files. Specify the target user song. If the automatically specified target user song is satisfactory, press the [0] button. The dial can be used to select a different target user song (SONG001–100) if desired before pressing the [0] button. USB flash memory save, delete, and format operations can only be performed when the instrument is being powered from an AC adapter. These operations cannot be performed using battery power. Overwriting Existing Song Select the Save SMF File function. Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many times as necessary until the “Save SMF” function appears. If a song that already contains data is selected as the target user song, an overwrite confirmation message will appear. r f 1 SONG001 4 Save SMF Save the user song. A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0] button to execute the save operation, or press the [-] button to cancel the operation. User songs will be saved in a folder labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically be created on the USB flash memory. NOTICE 2 Reference Select the file to be converted to SMF format. When the [0] button is pressed a user song name will be displayed: “User 1”, for example. If the displayed user song is the one you want to convert, press the [0] button. The dial can be used to select a different user song (User 1–5) prior to pressing the [0] button. The target user song name will be automatically displayed. User 1 80 Owner’s Manual • The save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during a save operation. Wait until a message indicating completion of the save operation appears. 5 Exit from the file control function mode. Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. NOTE • The amount of time required to save the file may vary depending on the condition of the USB flash memory used. Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) Loading User Files Loading Style Files User files saved to USB flash memory can be loaded into the instrument’s memory as required. A style loaded into style number 166 from either a USB flash memory or the instrument’s internal memory can be used in the same way as the internal styles. If the style is to be loaded from the instrument’s internal memory, the style file must first be transferred to the internal memory from a computer (page 87). NOTICE • When a user file is loaded the instrument’s 5 user songs, style 166, and registration memory will be overwritten. Save important data you want to keep to a separate USB flash memory before loading a user file. NOTICE • When a style file is loaded, style 166 will be overwritten. Select the Load Style function. Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many times as necessary until the “Load STY” function appears. r 1 f r Select the Load User File function. Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many times as necessary until the “Load USR” function appears. f 1 Load USR 2 3 Select the user file to be loaded. When the [0] button is pressed user files located on the USB flash memory will be displayed as “USERxxx” (“xxx” will be a number). If the initially selected file is the one you want to load, press the [0] button. If multiple user files are available the dial can be used to select a different user file before pressing the [0] button. The user file to be loaded must be located inside the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash memory. Files located outside that folder will not be recognized. Load the user file. A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0] button to execute the load operation, or press the [-] button to cancel the operation. 2 Select the style file to be loaded. When the [0] button is pressed style files located on the USB flash memory or in the instrument’s internal memory will be displayed. If the initially selected file is the one you want to load, press the [0] button. If multiple files are available the dial can be used to select a different style file before pressing the [0] button (100 files max.). Style files to be loaded from USB flash memory must be located in the flash memory’s root directory. 3 Load the style file. A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0] button to execute the load operation, or press the [-] button to cancel the operation. NOTICE NOTICE • The load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during a save operation. • The load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during a save operation. Wait until a message indicating completion of the load operation appears. 4 Exit from the file control function mode. Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. Reference Load STY Wait until a message indicating completion of the load operation appears. 4 Exit from the file control function mode. Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. Owner’s Manual 81 Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) Deleting User Files Deleting SMF Song Files This procedure deletes user files from a USB flash memory. This procedure deletes SMF song files that were created on this instrument from a USB flash memory. USB flash memory save, delete, and format operations can only be performed when the instrument is being powered from an AC adapter. These operations cannot be performed using battery power. USB flash memory save, delete, and format operations can only be performed when the instrument is being powered from an AC adapter. These operations cannot be performed using battery power. 1 1 Del USR Specify the user file to be deleted. When the [0] button is pressed user files located on the USB flash memory will be displayed as “USERxxx” (“xxx” will be a number). If the initially selected file is the one you want to delete, press the [0] button. If multiple user files are available the dial can be used to select a different user file before pressing the [0] button. The user file to be deleted must be located inside the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash memory. Files located outside that folder will not be recognized. 3 Delete the user file. A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0] button to execute the delete operation, or press the [-] button to cancel the operation. Reference 2 Del SMF 2 Specify the SMF file to be deleted. When the [0] button is pressed SMF song files located on the USB flash memory will be displayed as “SONGxxx” (“xxx” will be a number). If the initially selected file is the one you want to delete, press the [0] button. If multiple SMF song files are available the dial can be used to select a different user file before pressing the [0] button. The SMF song file to be deleted must be located inside the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash memory. Files located outside that folder will not be recognized. Also, the file name must be “SONGxxx”, where “xxx” is a number. 3 Delete the SMF song file. A confirmation message will appear. Press the [0] button to execute the delete operation, or press the [-] button to cancel the operation. NOTICE NOTICE • The delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during a save operation. • The delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during a save operation. Wait until a message indicating completion of the delete operation appears. 4 82 Exit from the file control function mode. Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. Owner’s Manual r Select the Delete SMF File function. Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many times as necessary until the “Del SMF” function appears. f r f Select the Delete User File function. Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many times as necessary until the “Del USR” function appears. Wait until a message indicating completion of the delete operation appears. 4 Exit from the file control function mode. Press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. Saving and Loading Data (NP-V80 Only) Exit From the File Control Function Mode To exit from the file control function mode press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. You can also exit from the file control function mode as follows: r Select the Exit item. Press the category [ ] or [ ] button as many times as necessary until “Exit?” appears. f 1 Message Comment Can’t use Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being accessed. Complet. Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Data Err Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Disk Ful Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory becomes full. Error Displayed when a file error or operational error occurs. File Ful Indicates that SMF songs cannot be displayed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. no data There is no data to save in the flash memory. no file There is no file to load or delete from the media. Our Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Protect Displayed when trying to save or delete data on a protected media, or format a protected media. Set protect to off and try again. Unformat Displayed when connecting an unformatted media. UseAdpt USB flash memory save, delete, and format operations cannot be performed when the instrument is being powered from battery. Use an AC adaptor. 2 Reference Exit? Exit. Press the [0] button to exit from the file control function mode. Owner’s Manual 83 Connecting to a Computer This instrument can be connected to a computer to allow transfer of MIDI data or a file. Connecting a Personal Computer USB terminal USB TO HOST terminal Instrument USB cable MIDI Basics If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book. MIDI Basics is available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library at: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Reference In order to be able to communicate with and use instruments connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI devices via a USB cable. The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USBMIDI driver is described on page 91. CAUTION • Connect the instrument to external equipment only after turning off power for all devices. Then, turn on the power, first to the instrument, then to the connected external equipment. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. 84 Owner’s Manual Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard or play back a song, etc.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Connecting to a Computer Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. MIDI settings PC Mode These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. Keyboard Out ExtClock KbdOut Description ON/ OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. ON/ OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). ON/ OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out StyleOut ON/ OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out SongOut ON/ OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this may be the most likely cause. If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 1 * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. Local PC1 PC2* OFF OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the PC mode item “PC Mode”. Reference External Clock Local Range/ Settings r Local Display f Item Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 oFF r 2 f PC mode Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. Use the dial to select ON or OFF. 3 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • Although User Songs can be transmitted from the instrument by using the Song Out function, Preset Song data cannot be transmitted in this way. Owner’s Manual 85 Connecting to a Computer Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument Song and Style files residing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument. Backup files can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. In order to transfer files between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide on page 89 for installation details. Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. Data Capacity: 1.5MB 512 files total for the Song and Style Data Format Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1 Style: (.sty) Backup File: 10PK6.BUP(NP-V80) 10PK5.BUP(NP-V60) InitSend What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? Reference 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can.  Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory.  refer to the procedure described on page 87. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example.  Backup files can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back.  refer to the procedure described on page 88. * Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. 86 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory NOTE At this point you can select a Style file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer it to the instrument in the same way as a song file. 6 • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (page 84). 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash memory.” NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-down menu that appears. Doubleclick the “SampleData” Folder on the window. Select the file from the “SongData” Folder you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. q Click the CD-ROM drive Reference 4 NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from your computer. w Double-click “SampleData” Folder  “SongData” Folder, and click a song file. e Click “Open” Owner’s Manual 87 Connecting to a Computer 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. A style file stored in flash memory must first be loaded into style number 166 on the NP-V80 or style number 161 on the NP-V60 via the Load Style File function before it can be played. Refer to page 81 for NP-V80 details, or to page 67 for NP-V60 details. NOTICE • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. NOTICE • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. • We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than batteries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... Reference When using songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons you can specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song r f (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. The default settings are channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. 88 Owner’s Manual Transfer a backup file from the instrument to a computer You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup Files” containing backup data (page 50), including the five User Songs stored on the instrument, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “10PK6.BUP(NP-V80), 10PK5.BUP(NP-V60)” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transmit backup file using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application. NOTICE • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. NOTICE • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement on page 95 before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. • This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. • The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. • Software such as the USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Make sure to check and download the latest version of the software from the following site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. Important Notices about the CD-ROM Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 91 for software installation instructions. CAUTION Reference • Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on equipment other than a computer. The result high-volume noise can potentially cause hearing damage or damage your equipment. Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. Owner’s Manual 89 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide CD-ROM Contents When the included CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, the following start window will appear automatically. (If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My computer” folder and double click “Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive.) q w Folder Name q MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader USBdrv32_ USB-MIDI Driver (for 32-bit version Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7) USBdrv64_ USB-MIDI Driver (for 64-bit version Windows XP/Vista/7) SongBook Song Book Reference w e Application / Data Name SampleData SongData MIDI 70 songs StyleData 5 style files MDB 5 Music Database data Contents This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory. Refer to page 93 for installation instructions. This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via USB. Refer to page 91 for installation instructions. Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11 and 30. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in the separate Data List. These songs, styles, or data can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument’s functions. In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer. Adobe Reader can be downloaded free at the Adobe website. 90 Owner’s Manual e Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide System Requirements Data Musicsoft Downloader USB Driver for Windows OS Computer Memory Hard Disk Display Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/ Vista * Only 32-bit is supported. Windows 7 233 MHz or higher; Intel Pentium/Celeron Processor family (500 MHz or higher is recommended) 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) 128 MB or more (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) Windows XP Professional (SP2/SP3)/XP Home Edition (SP2/SP3)/2000 (SP4) 166 MHz or higher; Intel Core/Pentium/Celeron processor 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) 10 MB or more — Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2) Intel 64 compatible processor 256 MB or more 10 MB or more — Windows Vista (SP0/SP1/ SP2) 800 MHz or higher; Intel Core/Pentium/Celeron processor or Intel 64 compatible processor 512 MB or more 10 MB or more — Windows 7 1.4 GHz or higher; Intel Core/Pentium/Celeron processor or Intel 64 compatible processor 1 GB or more (32bit)/2 GB or more (64-bit) 10 MB or more — 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) If you have any problems with the installation, refer to the troubleshooting section on page 93. 2 Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows. Close all applications and windows that are open. 3 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. 4 5 Turn off the power of the instrument. NOTE • The example displays shown in this guide are in English. Installing / Updating the USB-MIDI Driver In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI instruments connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from instruments via a USB cable. MIDI instrument USB Cable Driver Follow the steps below to install (or update) the USBMIDI driver. 1 Connect the USB connector of the computer to the USB connector of the MIDI instrument with a standard USB cable. NOTE • Do not use a USB hub for connecting multiple USB devices. NOTE • If you are using several MIDI instruments with USB connection at the same time, connect all the instruments to the computer and turn on the power for all of them, then perform the following installation procedure. Computer Sequence software Reference Software Installation 6 7 Turn on the power of the instrument(s). When the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears, click [Cancel]. NOTE • On some computers, it may take a few minutes before this screen appears. Disconnect all USB devices from the computer except for the mouse and computer keyboard. Owner’s Manual 91 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE Windows XP • This screen will not appear on Windows 7. When the message “Device driver software was not successfully installed.” appears, continue the installation procedure. NOTE • This screen will not appear if you are updating the USBMIDI driver from the previous version. Continue the installation procedure. 8 Open the following folder from the CDROM drive in your “My Computer” folder, and double click “setup.exe.” • For users of 32 bit version Windows 2000/XP/ Vista/7: “USBdrv32_” • For users of 64 bit version Windows XP/Vista/7: “USBdrv64_” Windows Vista/7 * Select [Start] menu  [Control Panel]  [System] to check the system. (Windows XP: “x64 Edition” appears on the 64 bit version, and does not appear on the 32 bit version.) 9 When the “File Download” window appears, click [Run] or [Open]. The “Preparing to install” window appears. The next window will appear after finishing this preparation. NOTE • The messages that appear in this window may differ somewhat depending on your browser. NOTE Reference • (Windows XP) If the “Security Warning” window appears, click [Run]. NOTE • (Windows Vista/7) If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue] or [Yes]. the “Welcome to the InstallShield 10 When Wizard for Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” window appears, click [Next]. If the warning message below appears during the installation, click [Yes], [Continue Anyway], or [Install]. Windows 2000 a message appears indicating 11 When that the driver has been successfully installed, click [Finish]. NOTE • On some computers, it may take a few minutes before this screen appears. a window appears prompting you 12 When to restart the computer, do so. Restart the computer by following the on-screen directions. NOTE • This display will not appear when using Windows XP x64/Vista/7. No restart is necessary. Checking the version of the driver Open the “Control Panel” and double-click the “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” icon. A window appears and the driver version is indicated in the lower left of the window. NOTE • When using Windows XP x64/Vista/7, double-click the “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver (WDM)” icon. 92 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide IMPORTANT • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows 2000, XP, Vista or 7. 1 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start window will appear automatically showing software applications. NOTE • If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My Computer” folder and double click “Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive. Then, proceed to step 2 below. 2 3 Click [Musicsoft Downloader]. Click the [Install] button, and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help”. * You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader at the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ IMPORTANT • Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application can be used. Troubleshooting The driver cannot be installed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add (Found) New Hardware Wizard” or the “Found New Hardware” window does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. 1 Select [Control Panel]*  [System]  [Hardware]  [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel]  [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. Reference Installing the Musicsoft Downloader 1 Select [Control Panel]*  [System]  [Hardware]  [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel]  [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type”. 3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device”. If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. 4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. 5 Install the driver again. (pages 91–92) Owner’s Manual 93 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver? (page 91) • Is the USB cable connected correctly? • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? • Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ Playback response is delayed. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? • Is any other application or device driver running? How can I remove the software? [Windows 2000/XP] 1 Disconnect all USB devices from the computer except for the mouse and keyboard. 2 Start the computer and log on to the Administrator account. Exit from any open applications and close all open windows. 3 From the [Start] menu, select ([Settings] ) [Control Panel]  [Add or Remove Programs] to display the Add or Remove Programs panel. 4 Click “Change or Remove Programs” located in the upper left, then select “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or “Yamaha Musicsoft Downloader” from the list in the right panel. 5 Click [Remove]. A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to remove the software. [Windows Vista/7] 1 Disconnect all USB devices from the comCannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. Reference • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. puter except for the mouse and keyboard. 2 Start the computer and log on to the Administrator account. Exit from any open applications and close all open windows. 3 From the [Start] menu, select the [Control Panel]  [Programs and Features] or [Uninstall a program] to display the “Uninstall or change a program” window. 4 Select “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or “Yamaha Musicsoft Downloader” from the list. 5 Click [Uninstall]. If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Allow] or [Continue]. A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to remove the software. 94 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 2. RESTRICTIONS • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation. Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Reference ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 8. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Owner’s Manual 95 Troubleshooting Appendix Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 85.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 68), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely The volume is too soft. new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 85. The style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 64) is set to an appropriate level. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 65). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. Appendix No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed after selecting the “Serenade” style in the Waltz category and all styles in the Pianist category. This is not a malfunction. The “Serenade” style in the Waltz category and all styles in the Pianist category styles have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t sound when playing arpeggios. You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony (the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback functions. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn it off. 96 The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any stylerelated function. The USB device does not respond. Disconnect the device from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. The file name of a file transferred to the instrument’s flash memory or a file on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument is not displayed. The number of file names that can be shown on the display is limited to 500 for song files and 100 for style files. Please limit the number of files accordingly. Owner’s Manual Specifications Keyboards Recording • 76 box type keys (E0–G6), with Touch Response. Display • LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX Realtime Control • Pitch Bend Wheel Voice • (NP-V80) 127 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices • (NP-V60) 116 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices • Polyphony: 32 • DUAL • SPLIT Style • NP-V80: 165 Preset style+External Files NP-V60: 160 Preset style+External Files • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi Finger • Style Volume Music Database Registration Memory • 8 banks x 4 types Function • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • • • • • • • • • • • • • Local On/Off • Keyboard Out • Initial Send • Style Out • External Clock • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN, USB, SUSTAIN, USB TO DEVICE Amplifier • 6W + 6W Speakers • NP-V80: (12cm x 6cm) x 2 + 5cm x 2 • NP-V60: (12cm x 6cm) x 2 Power Supply • Adaptor: • Batteries: Users within U.S.: PA-150 or an equivalent Others: PA-5D, PA-150 or an equivalent Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • NP-V80: 1264 x 312 x 111mm (49-3/4" x 12-5/16" x 4-3/8") • NP-V60: 1228 x 312 x 111mm (48-3/8" x 12-5/16" x 4-3/8") Weight • NP-V80: 7.1kg (15 lbs. 10 oz.) • NP-V60: 6.3kg (13 lbs. 14 oz.) Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Pitch Bend Range MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level DUAL VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level SPLIT VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume ARPEGGIO (NP-V80 only): Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity, Arpeggio Quantize, Arpeggio Pedal SFF Load (NP-V60): Style File Load Performance assistant technology: Performance assistant technology type PC: PC Mode Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send, MIDI: Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Metronome Volume LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade DEMO: Demo Group, Demo Play, Demo Cancel POWER SAVE LANGUAGE • AC Power Adaptor PA-150 * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • • • • • • Footswitch(NP-V80 only) Music Rest Accessory CD-ROM Owner’s Manual Data List My Yamaha Product User Registration * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Optional Accessories • AC Power Adaptor: Users within U.S.: PA-150 or an equivalent Others: PA-5D, PA-150 or an equivalent • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 • Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L • Headphones: HPE-150/30 • Footpedal: FC3 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Appendix • Dictionary • Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn • MIDI Supplied Accessories Education Feature • 5 Songs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE * Not including batteries • 305 • • Song User Song: Recording Tracks: Effects • • • • Reverb: Chorus: Harmony: Arpeggio: 9 types 4 types 26 types 50 types Song • 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs (70) • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume • Song Control: REPEAT&LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Performance assistant technology • Chord, Chord/Free Owner’s Manual 97 Index A F A-B Repeat ..................................................................71 Accessories ...................................................................7 ACMP ..........................................................................23 Arpeggio ......................................................................20 Arpeggio Pedal ...........................................................61 Arpeggio Quantize ..................................................... 60 Arpeggio Type ............................................................21 Arpeggio Velocity .......................................................60 Auto Accompaniment Range ....................................23 Auto-Accompaniment ..........................................22, 62 Fast-Forward (FF) ...................................................... 29 File Control ................................................................. 76 Fill ............................................................................... 62 Flash Memory ....................................................... 26, 87 Footswitch ............................................................. 11, 61 Format (USB Flash Memory) ................................... 78 Function ................................................................ 73–75 B Backup ................................................................... 50, 88 Bank .............................................................................48 C Channel .......................................................................88 Chord ...............................................................24–25, 68 Chord Dictionary ........................................................68 Chorus ......................................................................... 51 Chorus Level ...............................................................74 Computer .....................................................................84 G Grade ........................................................................... 31 H Harmony ..................................................................... 59 Harmony Volume ....................................................... 75 Headphones ................................................................ 11 I Initial Send .................................................................. 86 Initialization ................................................................ 50 Intro ............................................................................. 62 K D Keyboard Out ............................................................. 85 Default Setting ............................................................73 Delete (SMF Song) ....................................................82 Delete (Songs transferred from a computer) ............50 Delete (User File) .......................................................82 Delete (User Song) ..................................................... 47 Demo ...........................................................................29 Demo Cancel .............................................................. 75 Demo Group ...............................................................69 Demo Play Mode ........................................................69 Display ........................................................................15 Drum Kit .....................................................................16 Dual Voice .............................................................18, 57 Appendix E Easy Song Arranger ...................................................41 Effect ...........................................................................51 Ending ......................................................................... 62 External Clock ............................................................85 L Lesson ......................................................................... 30 Load (Style File) .................................................. 67, 81 Load (User File) ......................................................... 81 Local ............................................................................ 85 L-Part ........................................................................... 88 M Main (Section) ............................................................ 62 Main Voice .................................................................. 16 Master EQ Type ......................................................... 55 Measure ....................................................................... 15 Melody Voice .............................................................. 72 Metronome ............................................................ 19, 53 MIDI ............................................................................ 84 Music Database .......................................................... 40 Music Rest .................................................................... 7 Mute ............................................................................ 71 N Notation ...................................................................... 15 98 Owner’s Manual Index O T Octave ..........................................................................56 One Touch Setting ......................................................54 Tap Start ................................................................ 65, 72 Tempo (Metronome) .................................................. 19 Tempo (Song) ............................................................. 70 Tempo (Style) ............................................................. 64 Time Signature (Denominator) ................................. 53 Time Signature (Numerator) ..................................... 53 Touch Response .......................................................... 58 Touch Sensitivity ........................................................ 58 Track ............................................................................ 44 Track Clear ................................................................. 47 Transfer ................................................................. 86–88 Transpose .................................................................... 52 Troubleshooting (Installation) ................................... 93 Troubleshooting (Instrument) ................................... 96 Tuning ......................................................................... 53 Pan ...............................................................................56 Part (Right, Left) ........................................................30 PC Mode .....................................................................85 Performance assistant technology .............................35 Pitch Bend ...................................................................54 Pitch Bend Range .......................................................74 Power Adaptor ............................................................10 Preset Song ..................................................................26 R Recording ....................................................................43 Registration Memory .................................................48 Repeat ....................................................................33, 71 Reverb ..........................................................................51 Reverb Level ...............................................................74 Rewind (REW) ...........................................................29 R-Part ...........................................................................88 S Save (Backup File) ............................................... 50, 88 Save (Panel Setting) ...................................................48 Save (SMF Song) .......................................................80 Save (User File) ..........................................................79 Section ......................................................................... 62 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ........................................86 Song .............................................................................26 Song Clear ...................................................................47 Song Out .....................................................................85 Split Point ..............................................................18, 65 Split Voice .............................................................18, 57 Style .......................................................................22, 62 Style File .....................................................................67 Style Out .....................................................................85 Style Tempo ................................................................ 64 Sustain (Footswitch) .............................................11, 61 Synchro Start ........................................................ 23, 62 Synchro Stop ...............................................................63 U USB ............................................................................. 84 USB-MIDI Driver ...................................................... 91 User Song .................................................................... 43 V Voice ...................................................................... 16, 56 Volume (Dual Voice) .................................................. 56 Volume (Main Voice) ................................................. 56 Volume (master) ......................................................... 11 Volume (Song) ............................................................ 70 Volume (Split Voice) .................................................. 56 Volume (Style) ............................................................ 64 X XGlite ............................................................................ 6 Appendix P Owner’s Manual 99 LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, PSR-E, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by Yamaha. ©2009 Yamaha Corporation of America. 100 Owner’s Manual Effective: 11/01/09 Owner’s Manual 101 102 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 ITALY CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA SPAIN/PORTUGAL MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE EKB50 Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2010 Yamaha Corporation WT59290 XXXPOXXX.X-XXB0 Printed in China